[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2017119077A1 - Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus - Google Patents

Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017119077A1
WO2017119077A1 PCT/JP2016/050222 JP2016050222W WO2017119077A1 WO 2017119077 A1 WO2017119077 A1 WO 2017119077A1 JP 2016050222 W JP2016050222 W JP 2016050222W WO 2017119077 A1 WO2017119077 A1 WO 2017119077A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
cell
configuration
mobile station
location information
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2016/050222
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
小川浩二
田中隼輔
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujitsu Ltd
Original Assignee
Fujitsu Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujitsu Ltd filed Critical Fujitsu Ltd
Priority to PCT/JP2016/050222 priority Critical patent/WO2017119077A1/en
Publication of WO2017119077A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017119077A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/02Resource partitioning among network components, e.g. reuse partitioning
    • H04W16/06Hybrid resource partitioning, e.g. channel borrowing
    • H04W16/08Load shedding arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/16Performing reselection for specific purposes
    • H04W36/22Performing reselection for specific purposes for handling the traffic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/32Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by location or mobility data, e.g. speed data
    • H04W36/322Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by location or mobility data, e.g. speed data by location data
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a communication device, a base station device, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station device.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-Advanced successor systems Such a system is called fifth generation mobile communication (5G: the: 5th Generation mobile communication).
  • 5G the: 5th Generation mobile communication
  • CA Carrier Aggregation
  • AAS Active Antenna Array System
  • AAS is, for example, a base station system in which an antenna array and an active transmission unit array are integrated.
  • a radio signal transmission / reception function is integrated with an antenna and installed in a base station device, so that a high-quality service area can be realized, and the base station device can be downsized and power efficiency can be improved. Is possible.
  • one sector can be divided into a plurality of cells by cell forming in the vertical direction (Cell ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ splitting), or a plurality of carriers can be individually controlled (Carrier-specific tilting) by tilt control. Become.
  • handover for radio communication.
  • handover completion waiting timer T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall in LTE
  • T304 in LTE a handover completion waiting timer notified to the mobile station
  • the load may increase at the base station as compared to before the handover.
  • the mobile station may be handed over to the base station before starting operation. In this case, the mobile station may not be able to complete handover to the base station within the valid period of the handover completion waiting timer.
  • one disclosure is to provide a base station apparatus, a communication apparatus, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station apparatus that appropriately control the cell capacity.
  • one disclosure is to provide a base station device, a communication device, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station device that ensure continuity of communication.
  • a communication device connectable with a location information server that manages location information of a mobile station device
  • traffic information relating to traffic between a base station device and the mobile station device is received from the base station device
  • a transmitting / receiving unit that receives the location information of the mobile station device from the location information server, and a configuration of an antenna in the base station device is changed from a first configuration to a second configuration based on the traffic information and the location information
  • a determination unit that transmits an instruction to change to the second configuration to the base station device via the transmission / reception unit.
  • a base station apparatus it is possible to provide a base station apparatus, a communication apparatus, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station apparatus that appropriately control the cell capacity. Further, according to one disclosure, it is possible to provide a base station apparatus, a communication apparatus, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station apparatus that ensure communication continuity.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 3A shows an example of cell division
  • FIG. 3B shows an example of cell integration.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the base station apparatus.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile station apparatus.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the maintenance system.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an access gateway.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing flow.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing flow.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 3A shows an example of cell division
  • FIG. 3B
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing flow.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sequence at the time of handover failure.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sequence at the time of handover failure.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell integration.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell integration.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division / integration determination sequence.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division / integration determination sequence.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division / integration determination sequence.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of cell division.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing sequence.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of cell integration.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing sequence.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of handover from a neighboring eNB.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from a neighboring eNB.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of handover from a neighboring eNB.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from a neighboring eNB.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rollback sequence.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of the base station apparatus.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of the mobile station apparatus.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of a maintenance system, an access gateway, or a location information server.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system 10 according to the first embodiment.
  • the mobile communication system 10 includes a base station device 100, a mobile station device 200, a location information server 500, and a communication device 600.
  • the base station device 100 performs wireless communication with the mobile station device 200.
  • the location information server 500 manages traffic information related to traffic between the base station device 100 and the mobile station device 200.
  • the communication device 600 can be connected to the position information server 500.
  • the communication device 600 includes a transmission / reception unit 610 and a determination unit 620.
  • the transmission / reception unit 610 receives traffic information regarding traffic between the base station apparatus 100 and the mobile station apparatus 200 from the base station apparatus 100. Further, the transmission / reception unit 610 receives the position information of the mobile station device 200 from the position information server 500.
  • the determination unit 620 determines to change the antenna configuration in the base station apparatus 100 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information, and moves to the second configuration via the transmission / reception unit 610. Is transmitted to the base station apparatus 100.
  • the communication apparatus 600 can analyze, for example, the bias of the mobile station apparatus 200 connected to the base station apparatus 100 based on the traffic information and the position information. .
  • Communication apparatus 600 can determine the antenna configuration in base station apparatus 100 that can achieve optimal cell division or cell integration against such a bias.
  • the number of cells under the base station apparatus 100 is increased by dividing the cells under the base station apparatus 100 based on traffic information and location information, and the number of controllable (or accommodable) mobile station apparatuses 200 is increased. Also increases. Thereby, for example, the cell capacity of the base station apparatus 100 is appropriately expanded, and it becomes possible to cope with the congestion state in the base station apparatus 100.
  • cell integration under the base station apparatus 100 can be determined based on traffic information and position information.
  • the number of cells under the base station apparatus 100 decreases, it is possible to suppress inter-cell interference and frequent handovers due to the increase in the number of cells.
  • the cell capacity of the base station apparatus 100 can be appropriately reduced.
  • the mobile communication system 10 in the first embodiment can appropriately control the capacity of cells under the base station apparatus 100.
  • the base station apparatus 100 may determine to change the antenna configuration.
  • the base station apparatus 100 includes a traffic information management unit 170, a transmission / reception unit 171, and a control unit 172.
  • the traffic information management unit 170 acquires traffic information related to traffic between the mobile station device 200 and the base station device 100.
  • the transmission / reception unit 171 receives the location information of the mobile station device 200 managed by the location information server 500 from the location information server 500 via the communication device 600.
  • the control unit 172 changes the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information.
  • the base station apparatus 100 can determine cell division or integration by changing the antenna configuration based on traffic information and location information, and can appropriately increase or decrease the number of cells. It is also possible to control the cell capacity appropriately.
  • base station apparatus 100 transmits a handover start instruction including three new parameters to mobile station apparatus 200.
  • the three new parameters are, for example, “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”.
  • Cell Deployment Indicator indicates, for example, that the cell is divided or integrated.
  • Wiit Time indicates, for example, the processing time (or maximum processing time) from the start to the end of cell division processing or cell integration processing in the base station apparatus 100.
  • Sync Mode indicates, for example, whether the synchronization processing is performed by the base station device or the mobile station.
  • the mobile station apparatus 200 can invalidate the time set as a handover completion waiting timer (eg, T304) and perform the handover process using the timer indicated by “Wait Time”. It becomes possible. As a result, for example, the mobile station apparatus 200 can avoid a situation in which the handover to the divided cell cannot be performed due to the expiration of the handover completion waiting timer, and the time required for connection to the base station apparatus 100 is guaranteed. . Therefore, the mobile station apparatus 200 is guaranteed to be handed over to the cell after cell division or cell integration, and the mobile communication system 10 can ensure continuity of communication.
  • T304 a handover completion waiting timer
  • a cell is, for example, a network object that can be uniquely identified by (cell) identification information by a mobile station apparatus (hereinafter also referred to as “mobile station”).
  • the cell may be, for example, a service area formed by one base station apparatus (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “base station”), or a combination of the service area and the base station. Also good.
  • base station a base station apparatus
  • a cell and a base station may be used interchangeably without being distinguished.
  • AAS is, for example, a base station system in which an antenna array and an active transmission unit array are integrated.
  • AAS is a system in which a radio signal transmission / reception function is integrated with an antenna and mounted in a base station apparatus, for example.
  • AAS is described in Non-Patent Document 1 described above.
  • the antenna reconfiguration is, for example, changing the antenna configuration at the base station from the first configuration to the second configuration.
  • an example of antenna reconfiguration is AAS, and any method other than AAS may be used as long as the configuration of the antenna is changed.
  • AAS any method other than AAS may be used as long as the configuration of the antenna is changed.
  • a base station using AAS may be described, but the second embodiment can be implemented even for a base station that changes the antenna configuration by a method other than AAS. .
  • Non-Patent Document 4 six patterns are described as AAS. For example, there are cell splitting that divides cells by beam forming in the vertical direction, carrier-specific tilting that divides carriers (or frequencies) by controlling the tilt angle, and the like. Antenna reconfiguration enables cell division and integration, carrier division and integration, and the like.
  • the antenna reconfiguration patterns may include the six patterns described in Non-Patent Document 4 described above.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10.
  • the mobile communication system 10 includes base station devices (hereinafter also referred to as “base stations”) 100-1 and 100-2, mobile station devices (hereinafter also referred to as “mobile stations”) 200-1, 200-2.
  • base stations base station devices
  • mobile station devices hereinafter also referred to as “mobile stations”
  • the mobile communication system 10 includes an EMS / NMS (Element Management System / Network Management System) 300 (hereinafter also referred to as “maintenance system”), an access gateway 400, and a location information server 500.
  • EMS / NMS Event Management System / Network Management System 300
  • access gateway 400 access gateway
  • location information server 500 location information server
  • the communication device 600 in the first embodiment corresponds to the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400, for example.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 are wireless communication devices that perform wireless communication with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 located in the service area of the local station, for example.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 can divide or integrate cells under the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 by changing the antenna configuration. Such division can be realized by AAS, for example.
  • AAS for example.
  • FIG. 2 an example is shown in which one cell under the base station 100-1 is divided into two cells.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 acquire traffic information related to traffic in the radio section with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2.
  • the traffic information may be, for example, the number of packets transmitted / received per unit time or the number of bits (or data amount), the amount of radio resources allocated, the number of retransmissions, the retransmission rate, the handover success rate, and the like.
  • the base station 100-1 acquires traffic information by monitoring wireless communication with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2.
  • the base station 100-1 transmits the acquired traffic information to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400 periodically or upon request.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 can receive an antenna configuration change instruction from the maintenance system 300.
  • Base stations 100-1 and 100-2 change the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration in accordance with the instruction. By changing the antenna configuration (or by reconfiguring the antenna), each base station 100-1, 100-2 divides one cell under control into two cells, or integrates the two cells. It becomes possible to do.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 receive from the maintenance system 300 information (or instructions) of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over in accordance with the change of the antenna configuration.
  • the mobile station 200-2 located in the new cell after the division is instructed as a mobile station to be handed over.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are wireless communication devices such as feature phones, smartphones, tablet terminals, personal computers, and game devices, for example.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform various services such as a call service and a web page browsing service from the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 within the service areas of the base stations 100-1 and 100-2. Get offered.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can perform two-way wireless communication. That is, the direction from the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “downward direction”) and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to the base station This is a direction toward the stations 100-1 and 100-2 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “upward direction”).
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 When the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 perform wireless communication with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2, the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 allocate radio resources (time resources, frequency resources, etc.), and modulation methods, coding rates, etc. To decide. Each of the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 transmits a control signal including scheduling information such as radio resource allocation and modulation scheme to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. The base stations 100-1 and 100-2 and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform wireless communication according to the scheduling information included in the control signal.
  • the number of base stations and mobile stations is one. It may be one or more than two.
  • the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG. 2 an example is shown in which two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are connected to the base station 100-1, but the mobile station 200-1 is connected to the base station 100-1.
  • the number of stations may be 1 or 3 or more.
  • the maintenance system 300 is connected to the base station 100-1, but the maintenance system 300 may be connected to the base station 100-2. .
  • the maintenance system 300 is a system that performs maintenance and management of network elements, for example.
  • the maintenance system 300 collects traffic conditions and radio quality information from the base station 100-1.
  • the maintenance system 300 acquires the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the location information server 500. Then, maintenance system 300 determines to change the antenna configuration in base station 100-1 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the location information, and changes the configuration to the second configuration. Instructs the base station 100-1. Maintenance system 300 determines mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over by changing the antenna configuration, and instructs mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over to base station 100-1. To do. A configuration example of the maintenance system 300 will be described later.
  • the access gateway 400 is, for example, a gateway that manages access to the network.
  • the access gateway 400 may be, for example, an MME (Mobility Management Entity), SGW (Serving Gateway), PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway: PDN gateway), or the like.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • SGW Serving Gateway
  • PGW Packet Data Network Gateway: PDN gateway
  • the access gateway 400 can also decide to change the antenna configuration and instruct the base station 100-1.
  • the access gateway 400 acquires the traffic status and the cell configuration list from the base station 100-1, and acquires the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the location information server 500. Then, the access gateway 400 determines to change the antenna configuration in the base station 100-1 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information included in the traffic situation.
  • the base station 100-1 may notify the access gateway 400 of the traffic state change as the traffic state, and the access gateway 400 may determine the antenna configuration change based on the state change.
  • the access gateway 400 uses the antenna configuration list to grasp the latest antenna configuration in the base station 100, and determines to change the antenna configuration based on the antenna configuration list. Also good. In this case, after changing the antenna configuration, base station 100 transmits an antenna configuration list indicating the changed antenna configuration to access gateway 400. The access gateway 400 instructs the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over accompanying the change of the antenna configuration to the base station 100-1. In the following description, the traffic status and the traffic information may be used without being distinguished.
  • the location information server 500 holds location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 appropriately acquire the position information of the own station by GPS (Global Positioning System).
  • GPS Global Positioning System
  • the location information server 500 can acquire the location information acquired in the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 via the base station 100-1 and the access gateway 400. is there.
  • the location information server 500 transmits the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400 in response to requests from the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400.
  • the location information server 500 includes a storage device (or memory) such as a hard disk, and the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 is stored in such a storage device.
  • the location information server 500 may collect location information by any of the following three methods, for example. (1) GPS location information notified from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (A-GNSS (Assisted-Global Navigation Satellite System)) (2) Timing of pilot signals received from a plurality of base stations 100-1 and 100-2 (OTDOA (Observed Time Difference of Arrival)) (3) E-CID (Enhanced-Cell ID) measured by each of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2
  • A-GNSS Assisted-Global Navigation Satellite System
  • OTDA Observed Time Difference of Arrival
  • E-CID Enhanced-Cell ID
  • the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100-1 estimates the positions of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 by either of the following.
  • the base station 100-1 instructs the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to measure radio quality information (RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality), or path loss). To do. Thereafter, the base station 100-1 estimates the positions of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 by three-point positioning using the radio quality information acquired from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-1.
  • the base station 100-1 instructs the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to estimate position information, and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 use the wireless quality information to perform three-point positioning. Thus, the positions of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are estimated.
  • Each mobile station 200-1, 200-2 reports the result to the base station 100-1.
  • the base station 100-1 can also decide to change its own antenna configuration.
  • the base station 100-1 acquires the position information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the position information server 500 via the maintenance system 300, and configures the antenna configuration based on the position information and the traffic information. Decide to change from one configuration to the second configuration.
  • the base station 100-1 may acquire position information from the position information server 500 via the access gateway 400.
  • the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 have the same configuration, they may be described as the base station 100 unless otherwise specified. Further, since the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 have the same configuration, they may be described as the mobile station 200 unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 3A shows an example of cell division
  • FIG. 3B shows an example of cell integration.
  • FIG. 3A there is shown an example in which there is one cell under the base station 100 and the cell is divided into two cells by cell division.
  • the cell ID (Identity) of the cell before the division is “Cell # 1”, and the cell IDs of the two cells after the division are “Cell # 1” and “Cell # 2”.
  • the cell ID of the cell in which the mobile station 200-2 is located is the same as “Cell # 1” before and after the division and is not changed.
  • the cell ID of the cell in which mobile station 200-1 is located is changed to “Cell # 1” before division and to “Cell # 2” after division.
  • the mobile station 200-1 having the cell ID changed becomes a handover target, and the mobile station 200-2 without the cell ID change does not become a handover target and does not have to be handed over.
  • the base station 100 and the mobile station 200-1 perform handover processing.
  • the change of the cell ID by cell division is an example as described above.
  • the cell IDs of two cells after division may be changed.
  • the cell where the mobile station 200-1 is located is “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 2”
  • the cell where the mobile station 200-2 is located is “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 1”. It may be changed to “Cell # 3”.
  • both the two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are targeted for handover.
  • FIG. 3B there is an example in which there is one cell under the base station 100, and two cells are integrated into one cell by cell integration.
  • the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-1 is located before the integration is “Cell # 2”
  • the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-2 is located is “Cell # 1”. Both are changed to “Cell # 1”.
  • the mobile station 200-1 since the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-1 is located is changed, the mobile station 200-1 becomes a target for handover, and the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-2 is located is not changed. 200-2 is not a handover target.
  • the change of the cell ID by the cell integration is an example, and any cell ID may be changed by the cell integration as shown in FIG. 3B.
  • any of the mobile stations 200-1, 200-2 Are also subject to handover.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the base station 100.
  • the base station 100 includes an antenna 101, a reception radio unit 102, a reception multiple access processing unit 103, a demodulation / decoding unit 104, a control signal processing unit 105, a cell division / integration control unit (or a cell division / integration control unit. It may be referred to as a “cell control unit”.) 106 and an antenna control unit 107 are provided.
  • the base station 100 includes a traffic information management unit 108, a mobile station location information management unit 109, a TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) transmission / reception unit 110, a transmission power control unit 111, an encoding / modulation unit 112, a transmission A multiple access processing unit 113 and a transmission wireless unit 114 are provided.
  • a traffic information management unit 108 a mobile station location information management unit 109, a TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) transmission / reception unit 110, a transmission power control unit 111, an encoding / modulation unit 112, a transmission A multiple access processing unit 113 and a transmission wireless unit 114 are provided.
  • TCP / IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
  • the base station 100 may include the AAS 120.
  • the transceiver unit 125-1 includes the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114, and the antenna (or antenna element, which may be referred to as “antenna element” hereinafter) 126-1 includes the antenna 101. Is included.
  • the transceiver unit 125-1 and the antenna element 126-1 become one set 125-1, 126-1, and the AAS 120 has a plurality of sets 125-1, 126-1, 125-2, 126-2,. included.
  • the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114 in each of the transceiver units 125-1, 125-2,... Are connected to the reception multiple access processing unit 103 and the transmission multiple access processing unit 113, respectively.
  • the antenna control unit 107 controls the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114 in each of the transceiver units 125-1, 125-2,.
  • the plurality of transceiver units 125-1, 125-2,... Is a transceiver unit array, the plurality of antenna elements 126-1, 126-2,... Are antenna arrays, and the AAS 120 includes a transceiver unit array and an antenna array. May be.
  • the base station 100 includes a BBU (Base Band Unit) 121.
  • the BBU 121 and the AAS 120 may be connected by an optical fiber cable.
  • the BBU 121 includes a reception multiple access processing unit 103, a demodulation / decoding unit 104, a control signal processing unit 105, a cell control unit 106, a traffic information management unit 108, and a mobile station location information management unit 109.
  • the BBU 121 includes a TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110, a transmission power control unit 111, an encoding / modulation unit 112, and a transmission multiple access processing unit 113.
  • the BBU 121 and the AAS 120 may be installed at physically separated positions such as several meters to several kilometers.
  • the traffic information management unit 170 and the transmission / reception unit 171 in the first embodiment correspond to, for example, the traffic information management unit 108 and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110, respectively.
  • the control unit 172 in the first embodiment corresponds to, for example, the cell control unit 106 and the antenna control unit 107.
  • the antenna 101 receives a radio signal transmitted from the mobile station 200 and outputs the received radio signal to the reception radio unit 102. Further, the antenna 101 transmits the radio signal output from the transmission radio unit 114 to the mobile station 200.
  • the reception radio unit 102 converts the radio signal in the radio band received from the antenna 101 into a baseband signal in the baseband band (down-conversion). Reception radio section 102 outputs the converted baseband signal to reception multiple access processing section 103.
  • the reception multiple access processing unit 103 performs S / P (Serial-to-Parallel) conversion processing, FFT (Fast-Fourier Transform) processing, and the like on the baseband signal.
  • the reception multiple access processing unit 103 then separates the multiplexed signals based on information such as radio resources received from the cell control unit 106 and the like.
  • Reception multiple access processing section 103 outputs the separated signal to demodulation / decoding section 104 as a received signal.
  • Demodulation / decoding section 104 performs demodulation processing and error correction decoding processing on the received signal received from reception multiple access processing section 103 according to the modulation scheme and coding rate received from cell control section 106, etc. Data and control signals transmitted from the station 200 are reproduced.
  • the demodulation / decoding unit 104 outputs data to an application processing unit and the like, and outputs a control signal to the control signal processing unit 105.
  • the control signal processing unit 105 extracts information included in the control signal from the control signal received from the demodulation / decoding unit 104. Examples of information included in the control signal include information indicating handover completion.
  • the control signal processing unit 105 outputs the extracted information to the cell control unit 106.
  • Control signal processing section 105 generates a control signal in accordance with an instruction from cell control section 106 and outputs the generated control signal to transmission power control section 111. Examples of instructions from the cell control unit 106 include a handover instruction and a scheduling information creation instruction, and the control signal processing unit 105 may generate a control signal including such an instruction.
  • the cell control unit 106 controls cell division and cell integration by antenna reconfiguration. For example, the cell control unit 106 notifies the antenna control unit 107 of the changed configuration of the antenna 101 according to the antenna configuration change instruction received from the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. Alternatively, the cell control unit 106 receives traffic information regarding traffic to and from the mobile station 200 from the traffic information management unit 108, receives location information of the mobile station 200 from the mobile station location information management unit 109, and receives traffic information and location information. Change the cell configuration based on The cell control unit 106 notifies the antenna control unit 107 of the changed cell configuration. In addition, the cell control unit 106 transmits an antenna configuration list indicating the current configuration of the cell due to, for example, a change in the antenna configuration to the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. Also good.
  • the antenna control unit 107 controls the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114.
  • the antenna control unit 107 may instruct the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114 to change the beamforming according to an instruction from the cell control unit 106.
  • the antenna control unit 107 may instruct to change the tilt angle of the antenna 101 via the reception radio unit 102 or the transmission radio unit 114 in accordance with an instruction from the cell control unit 106.
  • the antenna control unit 107 may directly control the antenna 101 so as to change the tilt angle.
  • the traffic information management unit 108 manages traffic information related to traffic between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200.
  • the traffic information management unit 108 may acquire the traffic information by monitoring data output from the demodulation unit / decoding unit 104 or data input to the encoding / modulation unit 112.
  • the traffic information management unit 108 may acquire the radio resource scheduled by the cell control unit 106 from the cell control unit 106 and acquire the traffic information based on the radio resource.
  • the traffic information management unit 108 may periodically transmit the acquired traffic information to the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110.
  • the traffic information management unit 108 may output the acquired traffic information to the cell control unit 106.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 109 manages the location information of the mobile station 200 acquired via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. For example, the mobile station location information management unit 109 generates a location information acquisition request in accordance with an instruction from the cell control unit 106 and outputs the location information acquisition request to the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110.
  • the position information acquisition request is transmitted to the position information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400, and the position information server 500 transmits the position information to the base station 100 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 109 holds, for example, the acquired location information of the mobile station 200 in the internal memory, or outputs it to the cell control unit 106 in accordance with an instruction from the cell control unit 106.
  • the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 is connected to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400, and exchanges TCP packets with the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400.
  • the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 receives a TCP packet transmitted from the maintenance system 300, and extracts a cell configuration change instruction, information on the handover target mobile station 200, location information of the mobile station 200, and the like from the TCP packet. To do.
  • the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 outputs a cell configuration change instruction and handover target mobile station 200 information to the cell control unit 106, and mobile station 200 location information to the mobile station location information management unit 109.
  • the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 receives traffic information from the traffic information management unit 108, a location information acquisition request from the mobile station location information management unit 109, etc., and receives a TCP packet including these pieces of information according to instructions from the cell control unit 106. It is generated and transmitted to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400.
  • the transmission power control unit 111 receives transmission data, a control signal, and the like, and outputs transmission data, a control signal, and the like to the encoding / modulation unit 112 with transmission power according to the transmission power control value received from the cell control unit 106 or the like. .
  • the coding / modulation unit 112 performs error correction coding processing and modulation processing on the transmission data and control signal received from the transmission power control unit 111 according to the coding rate and modulation method received from the cell control unit 106 and the like. Etc.
  • the encoding / modulation unit 112 outputs the transmission data after the modulation processing as a transmission signal.
  • the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 performs IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transfer) processing, P / S (Parallel to Serial) conversion processing, and the like on the transmission signal output from the encoding / modulation unit 112 to perform multiple access. (For example, an OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access) signal). Transmission multiple access processing section 113 outputs the converted transmission signal to transmission radio section 114.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transfer
  • P / S Parallel to Serial
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access
  • the transmission radio unit 114 converts the transmission signal output from the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 into a radio signal by performing frequency conversion processing based on the frequency received from the cell control unit 106 or the like (up-conversion). To do. Transmission radio section 114 outputs a radio signal to antenna 101.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the mobile station 200.
  • the mobile station 200 includes an antenna 201, a reception radio unit 202, a reception multiple access processing unit 203, a demodulation / decoding unit 204, a control signal extraction unit 205, a handover control unit for cell division / integration (or a handover control unit for cell division and integration).
  • a handover controller for handover control unit for cell division / integration
  • the mobile station 200 includes a synchronization processing unit 207, a rollback control unit 208, a control signal processing unit 209, a transmission power control unit 210, an encoding / modulation unit 211, a transmission multiple access processing unit 212, and a transmission radio unit 213. .
  • the antenna 201 receives a radio signal transmitted from the base station 100 and outputs the received radio signal to the reception radio unit 202. Further, the antenna 201 receives the radio signal output from the transmission radio unit 213 and transmits the received radio signal to the base station 100.
  • the reception radio unit 202 performs amplification processing and frequency conversion processing on the radio signal based on the frequency received from the control signal extraction unit 205 or the like to convert the radio signal in the radio band into the radio signal in the baseband ( Down-convert).
  • Reception radio section 202 outputs the baseband signal to reception multiple access processing section 203.
  • the reception multiple access processing unit 203 performs A / D conversion processing, S / P conversion processing, FFT processing, and the like on the baseband signal to separate multiplexed baseband signals.
  • reception multiple access processing section 203 separates the baseband signal assigned to the own station according to the radio resource received from control signal extraction section 205.
  • Reception multiple access processing section 203 outputs the separated baseband signal to demodulation / decoding section 204 as a received signal.
  • Demodulation / decoding section 204 performs demodulation processing and error correction decoding processing on the received signal according to the modulation scheme and coding rate received from control signal extraction section 205, respectively, and transmits data and control transmitted from base station 100. Play the signal.
  • the control signal extraction unit 205 extracts a control signal from the output from the demodulation / decoding unit 204.
  • the control signal includes, for example, information indicating a handover instruction and scheduling information.
  • the control signal extraction unit 205 outputs the extracted control signal to the handover control unit 206.
  • the handover control unit 206 controls the handover in the mobile station 200 according to the control signal.
  • the handover control unit 206 instructs the synchronization processing unit 207 to perform the synchronization process during the handover process. Details of processing in the handover control unit 206 will be described in an operation example.
  • the synchronization processing unit 207 performs synchronization processing with the handover destination cell in accordance with an instruction from the handover control unit 206.
  • the synchronization processing unit 207 instructs the rollback control unit 208 to perform loadback control.
  • the synchronization processing unit 207 instructs the control signal processing unit 209 to generate a handover completion notification when the synchronization process is successfully performed on the handover destination cell.
  • the synchronization processing unit 207 may instruct the control signal processing unit 209 to generate a synchronization establishment processing request or the like during the synchronization processing.
  • the rollback control unit 208 controls each unit in the mobile station 200 according to the instruction from the synchronization processing unit 207 so that the mobile station 200 rolls back to the handover source cell.
  • the rollback is, for example, to return to the state before the handover, and to return the connection to the cell before the division even when the cell division fails. By rolling back, the mobile station 200 can connect to the original cell before division without performing reconnection processing to the cell before division.
  • the control signal processing unit 209 generates a control signal according to an instruction from the synchronization processing unit 207, and outputs the generated control signal to the transmission power control unit 210.
  • the control signal may include, for example, information indicating completion of handover or a synchronization establishment processing request.
  • the transmission power control unit 210 receives transmission data, control signals, etc., and encodes transmission data, control signals, etc. with transmission power according to the transmission power control values received from the control signal extraction unit 205, the handover control unit 206, etc.
  • the data is output to the modulation unit 211.
  • the coding / modulation unit 211 performs error correction coding processing, modulation processing, etc. on the transmission data output from the transmission power control unit 210 according to the coding rate and modulation method received from the control signal extraction unit 205, etc. Are applied respectively.
  • the encoding / modulation unit 211 outputs modulated transmission data and the like as a transmission signal.
  • the transmission multiple access processing unit 212 performs IFFT processing, P / S conversion processing, and the like on the transmission signal output from the encoding / modulation unit 211 to a signal corresponding to multiple access (for example, an OFDMA signal). Convert.
  • the transmission multiple access processing unit 212 outputs the converted transmission signal to the transmission radio unit 213.
  • the transmission radio unit 213 converts the transmission signal received from the transmission multiple access processing unit 212 into a radio signal by performing frequency conversion processing or amplification processing based on the frequency received from the control signal extraction unit 205 or the like. Convert). Transmission radio section 213 outputs a radio signal to antenna 201.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the maintenance system 300.
  • the maintenance system 300 includes a TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for a base station, a signal analysis unit 302, a traffic information management unit 303, a TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for a location information server, a signal analysis unit 305, and a mobile station location information management unit 306.
  • the maintenance system 300 includes a cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit (cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit and mobile station determination unit.
  • a determination unit determination unit
  • mobile station determination unit mobile station determination unit
  • the transmission / reception unit 610 in the first embodiment corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for base station and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for location information server.
  • the determination unit 620 in the first embodiment corresponds to the determination unit 307, for example.
  • the base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 exchanges TCP packets with the base station 100. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station receives the TCP packet transmitted from the base station 100, extracts traffic information and radio quality information from the received TCP packet, and signals the extracted traffic information and the like. The data is output to the analysis unit 302. Further, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station receives the cell configuration change instruction output from the determination unit 307, generates a TCP packet including the information, and transmits the generated TCP packet to the base station 100. To do.
  • the signal analysis unit 302 receives the traffic information output from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station, and outputs the received information to the traffic information management unit 303.
  • the traffic information management unit 303 manages traffic information transmitted from the base station 100.
  • the traffic information management unit 303 may appropriately store the traffic information received from the signal analysis unit 302 in the internal memory or output the traffic information to the determination unit 307.
  • the location information server TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 exchanges TCP packets with the location information server 500. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for the location information server receives the TCP packet transmitted from the location information server 500, extracts the location information of the mobile station 200 from the received TCP packet, and extracts the extracted location information and the like. Output to the signal analysis unit 305.
  • the signal analysis unit 305 receives the location information from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for the location information server, and outputs the received location information to the mobile station location information management unit 306.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 306 manages the location information of the mobile station 200 transmitted from the location information server 500.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 306 may appropriately store the location information received from the signal analysis unit 305 in an internal memory or transmit the location information to the determination unit 307.
  • the determination unit 307 changes the cell configuration in the base station 100 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information received from the traffic information management unit 303 and the location information received from the mobile station location information management unit 306. Decide what to do.
  • the determination unit 307 outputs a change instruction to the second configuration and a list of mobile stations that need to move to a new cell due to the change to the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the access gateway 400.
  • the access gateway 400 includes a base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401, a signal analysis unit 402, a traffic information management unit 403, a location information server TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404, a signal analysis unit 405, and a mobile station location information management unit 406.
  • the access gateway 400 includes a cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit (or a cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit and a mobile station determination unit; hereinafter referred to as a “determination unit”). 407 is provided.
  • the transmission / reception unit 610 in the first embodiment corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for base stations and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for location information servers.
  • the determination unit 620 in the first embodiment corresponds to the determination unit 407, for example.
  • the base station TCP / IP transceiver 401 exchanges TCP packets with the base station 100. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station receives the TCP packet transmitted from the base station 100, extracts a load state change notification, an antenna configuration list, and the like from the received TCP packet, and extracts the load state change Notification or the like is output to the signal analysis unit 402. Also, the base station TCP / IP transceiver 401 receives the cell configuration change instruction output from the determination unit 407, generates a TCP packet including these pieces of information, and transmits the generated TCP packet to the base station 100. To do.
  • the signal analysis unit 402 receives the load state change notification output from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station, and outputs the received load state change notification to the traffic information management unit 403.
  • the traffic information management unit 403 manages the load state change notification and the antenna configuration list transmitted from the base station 100.
  • the traffic information management unit 403 may appropriately store the load state change notification, the antenna configuration list, and the like received from the signal analysis unit 402 in the internal memory or may output them to the determination unit 307.
  • the location information server TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 exchanges TCP packets with the location information server 500. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for the location information server receives the TCP packet transmitted from the location information server 500, extracts the location information of the mobile station 200 from the received TCP packet, and extracts the extracted location information, etc. Output to the signal analysis unit 405.
  • the signal analysis unit 405 receives the location information output from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for the location information server, and outputs the received location information to the mobile station location information management unit 406.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 406 manages the location information of the mobile station 200 transmitted from the location information server 500.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 406 may appropriately store the location information received from the signal analysis unit 405 in an internal memory or output the location information to the determination unit 407.
  • the determination unit 407 changes the cell configuration in the base station 100 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the load state change notification received from the traffic information management unit 403 and the location information received from the mobile station location information management unit 406. Decide to change to The determination unit 407 outputs a change instruction to the second configuration and a list of mobile stations that need to move to a new cell due to the change to the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 have a function of collecting traffic information in the base station 100. Based on the collected traffic information, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 determine whether or not the traffic state between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 has transitioned from the normal state to the congestion state, or from the congestion state to the normal state. It is determined whether or not a state transition has been made. In this case, when the value indicated by the traffic information exceeds the congestion state threshold, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect that the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect that the state transition has been made from the congestion state to the normal state when the value indicated by the traffic information becomes lower than the normal state threshold (or the mitigation state threshold).
  • the relationship between the two thresholds may be, for example, congestion state threshold> normal state threshold. With this relationship, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of state changes such as from the normal state to the congestion state and from the congestion state to the normal state.
  • the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 determines to divide the cells under the base station 100.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect the positional deviation of the mobile station 200 based on the positional information acquired from the positional information server 500, and an antenna that performs optimal cell division against such deviation. Determine the configuration.
  • the number of cells under the base station 100 increases.
  • the number of mobile stations 200 that can be controlled (or accommodated) under the base station 100 also increases, and the cell capacity of the base station 100 increases. By expanding the cell capacity, the base station 100 can cope with the congestion state.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 can appropriately increase the cell capacity by determining the antenna configuration that provides the optimum cell division.
  • the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 determines to integrate cells under the base station 100.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect the positional deviation of the mobile station 200 based on the positional information acquired from the positional information server 500, and have an antenna configuration that provides optimum cell integration for such deviation. You may decide.
  • the base station 100 reduces the cell capacity and restores the configuration of the divided cells. Thereby, for example, since the number of cells accommodated in the base station 100 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the frequency of handover and to reduce the interference generated between the cells.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 can appropriately increase the cell capacity by determining the antenna configuration that provides the optimum cell division.
  • the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 can appropriately control the cell capacity, for example, by changing the cell configuration based on the traffic information and the location information.
  • the determination of cell division or integration may be further performed in the access gateway 400.
  • the access gateway 400 also collects traffic information and detects a state transition using a congestion state threshold or a normal state threshold.
  • processing related to cell division and integration determination is performed in the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400, so that, for example, operability and maintainability are compared with the case where the processing is performed in a plurality of base stations 100. Efficient management is possible.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell division processing is performed by the base station.
  • the base station 100 When the base station 100 starts processing (S10), it collects traffic information regarding traffic between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 (S11). For example, the traffic information management unit 108 may collect traffic information based on the amount of data output from the demodulation / decoding unit 104. Alternatively, the traffic information acquired by the mobile station 200 may be acquired from the mobile station 200, and the traffic information management unit 108 may acquire the traffic information output from the demodulation / decoding unit 104.
  • the base station 100 determines whether or not the traffic state between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 has changed from the normal state to the congestion state based on the collected traffic information (S12). For example, the cell control unit 106 detects that the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state occurs when the value indicated by the traffic information acquired from the traffic information management unit 108 exceeds the congestion state threshold (or the first threshold). When the value is equal to or less than the congestion state threshold value, it may be detected that the normal state is maintained.
  • the target of the state transition may be, for example, a load in a cell under the base station 100 or a load of the base station 100 itself, and such a load in the base station 100 has exceeded a congestion state threshold. It is sufficient if it can be detected. The same applies to the following.
  • the base station 100 determines to divide the cells under the base station 100 (S13). For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects that the traffic state has changed to a congestion state, the cell control unit 106 determines cell division.
  • the base station 100 requests the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 to collect location information of the mobile station 200 (S14).
  • the cell control unit 106 instructs the mobile station location information management unit 109 to collect location information, and the mobile station location information management unit 109 sends the location information collection instruction via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. 300 or access gateway 400.
  • the collection instruction is transmitted to the location information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400.
  • the base station 100 receives the position information from the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 after the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 acquires the position information from the position information server 500 (S15).
  • the location information server 500 transmits the location information of the corresponding mobile station 200 to the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 according to the collection instruction, and the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 transmits the received location information to the base station 100.
  • the mobile station location information management unit 109 receives location information transmitted from the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110, and outputs the received location information to the cell control unit 106.
  • the base station 100 determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided from the distribution status of the mobile stations 200 (S16). For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects that the load of the base station 100 exceeds the congestion state threshold based on the traffic information, the cell control unit 106 changes the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the position information. By changing, it is determined to divide cells under the base station 100. For example, the cell control unit 106 determines the bias of the mobile station 200 from the position information of each mobile station 200 at the time when the traffic volume exceeds the congestion state threshold, and determines the antenna configuration that is the optimal cell configuration. In this case, the cell control unit 106 may determine the antenna configuration so that, for example, the number of mobile stations 200 arranged in each divided cell is uniform.
  • the base station 100 determines the mobile station 200 to be arranged in the new cell based on the location information (S16).
  • the cell control unit 106 may determine the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID has been changed in each divided cell based on the location information.
  • the base station 100 executes handover control for the mobile station 200 to a new cell (S18).
  • the cell control unit 106 instructs the antenna control unit 107 to divide the cell, and instructs the control signal processing unit 105 to execute handover to the mobile station 200 arranged in the new divided cell.
  • the base station 100 performs handover processing by exchanging control signals with the mobile station 200 via the control signal processing unit 105.
  • the base station 100 ends a series of processes (S19).
  • the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the normal state to the congestion state (No in S12), the base station 100 ends the series of processing without performing processing such as cell division (S19). .
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell division processing is performed under the initiative of the maintenance system 300.
  • the maintenance system 300 When the maintenance system 300 starts processing (S30), it collects traffic information from the base station 100 (S31). For example, the traffic information management unit 303 collects traffic information transmitted from the base station 100 by receiving it.
  • the maintenance system 300 determines whether or not the traffic state between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 has transitioned from the normal state to the congestion state (S32). For example, the determination unit 307 detects a state transition from the normal state to the congestion state when the value indicated by the traffic information acquired from the traffic information management unit 303 exceeds the congestion state threshold, and the value is equal to or less than the congestion state threshold. Sometimes it may be detected that the normal state is maintained.
  • the maintenance system 300 determines to divide the cell under the base station 100 (S33), and from the location information server 500 to the mobile station The position information of 200 is acquired (S34). For example, when the determination unit 305 detects a state transition to a congestion state, it determines cell division, instructs the mobile station location information management unit 306 to acquire location information, and the mobile station location information management unit 306 The position information is acquired from the server 500.
  • the maintenance system 300 determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided from the distribution status of the mobile station 200 (S35). For example, when the determination unit 307 detects that the load of the base station 100 has exceeded the congestion state threshold based on the traffic information, similarly to the cell control unit 106, the determination unit 307 sets the first antenna configuration based on the position information. It is determined to change the configuration to the second configuration and divide the cells under the base station. In this case, the determination unit 307 analyzes the bias of the mobile station 200 based on the position information, and determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided. The determination unit 307 may determine the antenna configuration so that the number of mobile stations 200 arranged in each divided cell is uniform, as in the case of the base station initiative (for example, S16).
  • the base station initiative for example, S16
  • the maintenance system 300 determines the mobile station 200 to be placed in a new cell and to be handed over from the location information (S36). For example, the determination unit 307 determines the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID has been changed in each divided cell based on the position information.
  • the maintenance system 300 instructs the determined antenna configuration and the mobile station 200 to be handed over to the base station 100 (S37).
  • the determination unit 307 transmits the changed antenna configuration corresponding to the cell division to the base station 100 via the base station-oriented TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301.
  • the determination unit 307 transmits the handover target mobile station list including the handover target mobile station 200 determined in S36 to the base station 100 via the base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301.
  • the mobile station 200 included in the list is processed as a handover target mobile station.
  • the maintenance system 300 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover control to the handover target mobile station 200 (S38).
  • the determination unit 307 instructs the base station 100 via the base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 to perform handover to the mobile station 200.
  • the base station 100 executes handover control for the mobile station 200 to be handed over.
  • the maintenance system 300 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the normal state to the congestion state (No in S32), the maintenance system 300 ends the series of processes without determining the cell division (S39).
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell division is performed under the initiative of the access gateway 400.
  • the base station 100 collects traffic information (S51).
  • the base station 100 determines whether or not the traffic state has changed from the normal state to the congestion state (S52).
  • the base station 100 When the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has transitioned from the normal state to the congestion state (Yes in S52), the base station 100 generates a load state change notification indicating that the traffic state has changed from the normal state to the congestion state. A notification is transmitted to the access gateway 400 (S53). For example, when detecting a state transition to a congestion state, the cell control unit 106 generates a load state change notification and transmits the generated load state change notification to the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110.
  • the access gateway 400 decides to divide the cell under the base station 100 because the traffic state changes from the normal state to the congestion state based on the load state change notification (S54).
  • the determination unit 407 receives a load state change notification from the traffic information management unit 403, and determines cell division based on the notification.
  • the access gateway 400 acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 from the location information server 500 (S55).
  • the mobile station location information management unit 406 acquires location information from the location information server 500 via the location information server-oriented TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 and the like.
  • the access gateway 400 determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided from the distribution status of the mobile station 200 (S56). For example, when the determination unit 407 detects that the load of the base station 100 exceeds the congestion state threshold based on the traffic information, similarly to the cell control unit 106, the determination unit 407 sets the first antenna configuration based on the position information. It is determined to change the configuration to the second configuration and divide the cells under the base station. In this case, the determination unit 407 analyzes the bias of the mobile station 200 based on the position information, and determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided. The determination unit 407 may determine the antenna configuration so that the number of mobile stations 200 arranged in each divided cell is uniform, as in the case of the base station initiative (for example, S16).
  • the base station initiative for example, S16
  • the access gateway 400 determines the handover target mobile station 200 to be arranged in the new cell from the location information (S57). For example, the determination unit 407 determines the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID has been changed in each divided cell based on the location information.
  • the access gateway 400 transmits the antenna configuration (or the instruction to change to the second configuration) and information on the mobile station 200 to be handed over to the base station 100 (S58).
  • the determination unit 407 uses the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station to transmit information regarding the antenna configuration (or the instruction to change to the second configuration) corresponding to the divided cells and the mobile station 200 to be handed over determined in S57. To the base station 100.
  • the access gateway 400 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover control to the new cell for the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S59).
  • the determination unit 407 instructs the base station 100 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station to execute handover for the mobile station 200.
  • the access gateway 400 ends a series of processes (S60).
  • the access gateway 400 when the access gateway 400 does not receive the load state change notification indicating the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state from the base station 100 (No in S52), the access gateway 400 performs a series of processes without performing the process such as the determination of the antenna configuration. The process is terminated (S60).
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell integration is performed under the initiative of a base station.
  • the base station 100 When the base station 100 starts processing (S70), it collects traffic information (S72).
  • the base station 100 determines whether or not the traffic state has changed from the congestion state to the normal state based on the traffic information (S72). For example, the cell control unit 106 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state when the value indicated by the traffic information becomes smaller than the normal state threshold, and the congestion state is maintained when the value is equal to or greater than the normal state threshold. Detect that The target of the state transition may be, for example, a load in a cell under the base station 100 or a load of the base station 100 itself, as long as it can detect that such a load in the base station 100 has decreased. The same applies to the following.
  • the base station 100 determines to integrate cells under the base station 100 (S73). For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects a transition from a congestion state to a normal state, the cell control unit 106 determines to integrate cells.
  • the base station 100 requests the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 to collect location information of the mobile station 200 (S74).
  • the base station 100 receives the position information by transmitting the acquired position information to the base station 100 (S75). .
  • the base station 100 is located in the cell to be integrated and extracts the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S76).
  • the cell control unit 106 extracts the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID is changed in the cell after integration based on the location information of the mobile station 200 acquired from the mobile station location information management unit 109. May be.
  • such a mobile station 200 can be a handover target after cell integration.
  • the base station 100 executes handover control to the cell after integration for the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S77).
  • the cell control unit 106 instructs the antenna control unit 107 to perform cell integration, and instructs the control signal processing unit 105 to execute handover to the mobile station 200 that is a handover target in the integrated cell.
  • the base station 100 performs handover processing by exchanging control signals with the mobile station 200 via the control signal processing unit 105.
  • the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the congestion state to the normal state (No in S72), the base station 100 ends the series of processes without performing cell integration (S78).
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell integration is performed under the initiative of the maintenance system 300.
  • the maintenance system 300 When the maintenance system 300 starts processing (S90), it collects traffic information from the base station 100 (S91), and determines whether the traffic status has changed from a congestion state to a normal state based on the collected traffic information. (S92). For example, the determination unit 307 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state when the value indicated by the traffic information becomes smaller than the normal state threshold, and the congestion state is maintained when the value is equal to or greater than the normal state threshold. Detect that.
  • the maintenance system 300 When the maintenance system 300 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state (S92), the maintenance system 300 determines cell integration (S93), and acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 from the location information server 500 (S95). For example, the determination unit 307 determines to integrate the divided cells and return to the cell before the division, and acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 via the mobile station location information management unit 306.
  • the maintenance system 300 extracts the mobile station 200 located in the cell to be integrated (S96).
  • the determination unit 307 extracts the mobile station 200 residing in the cell whose cell ID is changed in the integrated cell based on the location information of the mobile station 200 acquired from the mobile station location information management unit 306. Also good.
  • such a mobile station 200 can be a handover target after cell integration.
  • the maintenance system 300 instructs the base station 100 of the determined antenna configuration and the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S97).
  • the determination unit 307 transmits, to the base station 100, the antenna configuration corresponding to the integrated cell and the handover target mobile station list including the information of the mobile station 200 extracted in S96.
  • the maintenance system 300 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover to the cell after integration for the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S98).
  • the determination unit 307 instructs the base station 100 to handover the handover target mobile station 200 to the integrated cell.
  • the maintenance system 300 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the congestion state to the normal state (No in S92), the maintenance system 300 ends the series of processing without performing processing such as cell integration (S99). .
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell integration is performed under the initiative of the access gateway.
  • the base station 100 collects traffic information (S111), and determines whether the traffic status has changed from the congestion state to the normal state based on the traffic information (S111). S112).
  • the base station 100 determines the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state (Yes in S112), the base station 100 transmits a load state change notification indicating the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state to the access gateway 400.
  • the cell control unit 106 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state based on the congestion state threshold, the cell control unit 106 generates a load state change notification indicating the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state, and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110.
  • the access gateway 400 receives a load state change notification indicating the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state.
  • the access gateway 400 determines the integration of the cells under the base station 100 (S113). For example, the determination unit 407 may determine to integrate the divided cells and return to the cell before the division.
  • the access gateway 400 acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 from the location information server 500 (S115), and extracts the mobile station 200 located in the integrated cell based on the location information (S116).
  • the determination unit 407 may extract the mobile station 200 residing in the cell whose cell ID is changed in the integrated cell based on the location information.
  • the access gateway 400 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover to the cell after integration with respect to the handover target mobile station 200 (S117).
  • the determination unit 407 instructs the base station 100 to handover the handover target mobile station 200 to the integrated cell.
  • the determination unit 407 may transmit the antenna configuration corresponding to the integrated cell to the base station 100.
  • the access gateway 400 ends a series of processes (S118).
  • the access gateway 400 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the congestion state to the normal state (No in S112), the access gateway 400 ends the series of processing without performing processing such as cell integration (S118). ).
  • Processing when dividing cells> when the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 detects a state transition from the normal state to the congestion state based on the traffic information, it determines cell division. The maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 also instructs the mobile station 200 arranged in the new cell to execute handover by dividing the cell.
  • the base station 100 determines the time required for cell division for the mobile station 200 to be handed over to the new cell after division from its own load status.
  • the time required for cell division (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “processing time”) is, for example, the processing time with respect to the usage rate of the CPU (Central Processing Unit) of the base station 100 and the allocation rate of radio resources. Also good. Such a numerical value may be calculated or a predefined value may be used.
  • the base station 100 determines whether the synchronization processing with the handover destination base station is performed by the mobile station (non-contention (non-contention mode)) or the base station (contention (contention mode)). Determine based on.
  • the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the base station. This is because, when the processing time takes more than the reference value, if the synchronization processing is led by the mobile station, the mobile station 200 makes many requests for the synchronization processing even though the time required for cell division takes more than the reference value.
  • the power consumption of the mobile station 200 requires more power than the normal value. Therefore, in such a case, by performing synchronization processing led by the base station, the mobile station 200 waits for synchronization processing during cell division processing, and synchronization processing is started by a request from the base station 100 after cell division is completed. Thus, the power consumption of the mobile station 200 can be reduced as compared with the case where the mobile station takes the initiative.
  • the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the mobile station. This is because the processing time due to cell division is less than the reference value, and thus the power consumption of the mobile station 200 does not exceed the normal value even if the synchronization processing is performed under the initiative of the mobile station.
  • Whether the synchronization processing is performed by the base station or the mobile station may be performed by the cell control unit 106 of the base station 100, for example.
  • the cell control unit 106 may receive the instruction of the changed antenna configuration from the maintenance system 300 or may determine the antenna configuration by comparing the processing time with the reference value after determining the antenna configuration.
  • FIG. 14 shows an example in which cell # 1 subordinate to base station 100-1 is divided into cell # 1 and cell # 2 by cell division, and two mobile stations 200- In this example, 1,200-2 is arranged.
  • the two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are mobile stations to be handed over from the cell # 1 to the cell # 2.
  • the base station 100-1 acquires the traffic information and transmits the acquired traffic information to the maintenance system (S120). For example, when the base station 100-1 acquires the traffic information, the base station 100-1 periodically transmits the traffic information to the maintenance system 300.
  • the base station 100-1 determines whether or not to divide the cell (S121). Base station 100-1 determines whether or not to divide a cell based on whether or not the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state is performed based on the traffic information.
  • the base station 100-1 determines to divide the subordinate cell (Yes in S121)
  • the base station 100-1 acquires location information from the location information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 (S122).
  • the base station 100-1 analyzes the positional deviation of the mobile station 200 connected to the base station 100-1 based on the acquired location information, and determines the configuration of the cell # 2 (S123). In this case, the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell division is longer than the reference value, and determines to perform base station-led synchronization processing.
  • the base station 100-1 transmits a handover start instruction to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 arranged in the divided cell # 2 (S124, S125).
  • the first parameter is “Cell Deployment Indicator”.
  • Cell Deployment Indicator is, for example, a parameter indicating whether or not to disable the handover monitoring condition.
  • the “Cell Deployment Indicator” notifies the mobile station 200 of the situation where cell division or cell integration is performed in the base station 100, for example.
  • the mobile station 200 can recognize that cell division or cell integration is performed in parallel in the base station 100 by notifying this parameter, and can invalidate a normal handover completion waiting timer (for example, LTE T304). It becomes.
  • a handover completion waiting timer is, for example, a timer that is instructed by the base station 100 and set on the mobile station 200 side.
  • this parameter for example, an event that causes a handover failure when cell division or cell integration is not completed because a handover completion waiting timer expires can be suppressed.
  • the second parameter is “Wait Time”.
  • “Wait Time” is, for example, a monitoring timer that guarantees the time until cell division processing is completed instead of the invalidated handover completion waiting timer.
  • “Wait Time” indicates, for example, the processing time (or the maximum processing time) required until the base station 100 completes the cell division or cell integration processing and the guaranteed time for executing the synchronization processing with the mobile station 200. Therefore, this parameter is desirably determined by measuring the time required for cell division or cell integration processing under various conditions in system verification by the operator. In addition, this parameter can individually define the maximum processing time for each condition under various conditions (call processing load, CPU usage rate, etc.), and the maximum processing time under all assumed conditions. Can also be defined.
  • the handover completion waiting timer (T304) in LTE has a setting range of “100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 4000 ms, and 8000 ms” in 3GPP, and is waiting for a maximum of 8 seconds.
  • This parameter avoids completing the cell division or integration process in the base station 100 within this period due to handover restrictions, and indicates a longer processing time by indicating the processing time depending on the base station 100 with “Wait Time”. (For example, 1s to 3600s) can be specified.
  • the time indicated by “Wait Time” may be longer than the time set as the time until the mobile station 200 starts the handover process and ends it.
  • “Wait Time” is used as a substitute for the handover completion waiting timer invalidated by “Cell Deployment Indicator”, and handover processing according to cell division or cell integration processing depending on base station 100 Is possible.
  • the third parameter is “Sync Mode”.
  • the mobile station 200 side fails in the synchronization establishment process in the commonly used contention mode (driven by the mobile station). Thus, retransmission is repeated while increasing the transmission power. Therefore, in this case, the power consumption of the mobile station 200 may be a problem.
  • the base station 100 uses the “Wait Time” as a reference when the time required for cell division or cell integration is shorter than the reference value, and when it is longer than the reference value, it is used as the non-contention mode (base station initiative).
  • the burden on the mobile station 200 can be reduced.
  • synchronization establishment processing in non-contention mode is desirable, but the length of time required for cell division or cell integration processing and the base station 100 side instructs synchronization establishment processing It is desirable to appropriately define “Sync Mode” in consideration of the processing burden to be performed.
  • the mobile station 200 invalidates the normally used handover completion waiting timer, and is indicated by “Wait Time”. I will wait for a long time.
  • a synchronization establishment instruction request is transmitted from the base station 100 to the mobile station 200. Therefore, the maximum transmission delay in the radio section until the base station-initiated synchronization establishment instruction request arrives at the mobile station 200 during the maximum processing time for cell division or cell integration (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “maximum processing time”).
  • Time or “time lag”, hereinafter “maximum transmission delay time” taking into account the time (for example, “maximum processing time” + “maximum transmission delay time”) may be set as “Wait Time”.
  • a time considering the number of retransmissions and the retransmission interval of the synchronization establishment instruction request (for example, “maximum processing time” + “maximum transmission delay time” ⁇ “retransmission number” + “retransmission interval” ⁇ “retransmission number ⁇ 1”) May be “Wait Time”.
  • a base station-initiated synchronization establishment instruction request may be transmitted from the base station 100 when the timer in the mobile station 200 reaches the maximum processing time. Even in such a case, in order to avoid the risk that the mobile station 200 cannot perform the synchronization process, the maximum transmission delay time is considered for “Wait Time”. After the “Wait Time” period expires, the mobile station 200 waits for a synchronization establishment processing request from the base station 100, and starts the synchronization processing when receiving the request.
  • Sync Mode contention mode
  • the timer in the mobile station 200 reaches the maximum processing time
  • a synchronization establishment instruction request transmitted from the mobile station 200 Can receive.
  • the timer reaches the maximum processing time there is a possibility that the synchronization processing is not in time. Therefore, in the case of the competitive mode, a time that allows one or more retransmissions is added as a margin to the maximum processing time, and the time after the addition may be “Wait Time”.
  • the margin can be calculated from, for example, the number of retransmissions (maximum value preambleTransMax parameter in LTE) and the retransmission interval (maximum value specified in Backoff Parameter in LTE).
  • the base station 100 or the like by setting the number of retransmissions to the maximum value for one retransmission interval, it is possible to guarantee at least one retransmission in the mobile station 200 even when the maximum time is required for antenna reconfiguration.
  • an operator or the like may specify the number of retransmissions to be guaranteed within the range of the number of retransmissions.
  • the mobile station 200 it is possible to give the mobile station 200 a handover condition that is suitable for cell division processing depending on the base station 100, and to implement it. Further, the normal handover waiting timer is invalidated by the three parameters, and the division processing time is guaranteed, and a situation in which handover to the cell after division cannot be performed due to timeout can be avoided. Therefore, in the mobile station 200, handover to the cell after the division that occurs due to the cell division is guaranteed, and it is possible to ensure continuity of communication even when the cell division is performed.
  • these three parameters may be generated when, for example, the cell control unit 106 generates a handover start instruction (S124, S125). That is, the cell control unit 106 generates a handover start instruction, generates three parameters, and outputs them to the control signal processing unit 105.
  • the control signal processing unit 105 generates a control signal including a handover start instruction and three parameters, and transmits the control signal to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 via the transmission power control unit 111 and the like.
  • the control signal is transmitted to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 as, for example, a handover start instruction (S124, S125).
  • band a band
  • frequency a frequency
  • base station 100-1 After transmitting the handover start instruction, base station 100-1 executes cell division (S126). After the processing time has elapsed, cell # 2 is divided, and base station 100-1 accommodating cell # 2 establishes synchronization. A processing request is transmitted to the two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S127, S131 in FIG. 15). In accordance with the request, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform synchronization processing with the base station 100-1 accommodating the cell # 2 (S128, S129, S132 and S133 in FIG. 15), and after the synchronization is established, the handover is completed. A notification is transmitted to the base station 100-1 (S130, S134 of FIG. 15).
  • the base station 100-1 does not perform cell division (No in S121), the base station 100-1 ends the series of processing without performing cell division processing or the like.
  • FIG. 16 is a sequence example illustrating an operation example when cell division fails in the base station 100-1 in the same situation as FIG. 14 and FIG. Each process illustrated in FIG. 16 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • the base station 100-1 performs the cell division process (S126), if the cell division process is not completed even after the processing time elapses, the cell division fails (S141).
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 wait for the time indicated by “Wait Time” in response to the handover start instruction (S124, S125), and receive a synchronization establishment processing request from the base station 100 during that time. Wait. However, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 do not receive the synchronization establishment processing request from the base station 100-1 even after the time indicated by “Wait Time” has elapsed. As a result, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can detect that the cell division process has failed.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 avoid the reconnection process that is performed when a normal handover fails, and roll back to the original cell (S142). As a result, for example, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can connect to the original cell without performing transmission / reception of a control signal or the like by reconnection processing, ensuring continuity of communication, It is possible to reduce the power consumption of 200-1 and 200-2.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates an example in which the mobile station 200-1 performs rollback to the original cell, but the mobile station 200-2 may perform rollback.
  • the mobile station 200 determines that the base station (or A handover or reconnection procedure may be executed for the cell) (S143).
  • FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a sequence example in such a case. The processes shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell division is equal to or less than the reference value.
  • the base station 100-1 determines that the synchronization processing is performed by the mobile station (contention mode) (S123).
  • base station 100-1 performs cell division (S126), and mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 transmit a synchronization establishment instruction request to a new cell (cell # 2) and wait for a response to the request. (S152, S153).
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 repeat the request transmission and standby for the period specified by “Wait Time”.
  • mobile station 200-1 When cell division is executed in base station 100-1, mobile station 200-1 receives a response to synchronization establishment instruction request (S154) from base station 100-1 (S155), and accommodates cell # 2. Synchronization processing is performed with the base station 100-1. When the mobile station 200-1 establishes synchronization with the base station 100-1, the mobile station 200-1 transmits a handover completion notification to the base station 100-1 (S156). Similar processing is performed in the mobile station 200-2 (S157 to S159 in FIG. 18).
  • FIG. 19 shows a sequence example when cell division fails. Each process illustrated in FIG. 19 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • the cell division process is executed in the base station 100-1 (S126), if the cell division process is not completed even after the processing time has elapsed, the cell division has failed (S141).
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 transmit a synchronization establishment instruction request to the base station 100-1 that accommodates the cell # 2 (S161 to S163).
  • the base station 100-1 cannot receive the synchronization establishment instruction request.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 do not receive a response to the synchronization establishment instruction request even when the period specified by “Wait Time” expires, so that the base station 100-1 does not perform cell division. It becomes possible to detect failure.
  • the original cell (cell # 1) remains in the cell arrangement after the division.
  • rollback to the original cell is performed (S142).
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can avoid the reconnection procedure performed when a normal handover fails, and can connect to the original cell without transmitting / receiving control signals and the like by the reconnection process, thereby enabling communication continuity. And the power consumption of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can be reduced.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 detect the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 at the highest level, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform a handover or reconnection procedure to the base station 100-2. It is good (S143).
  • base station 100-1 that performs cell division notifies configuration change notification to neighboring base station 100-2.
  • the configuration change notification includes, for example, three parameters “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 can grasp that the cell division is performed in the base station 100-1, and a normal handover completion waiting timer (for example, T RELOCprep in LTE in the case of performing handover to a new cell ).
  • TX2 RELO Coverall can be invalidated. Therefore, the mobile station 200 can perform handover from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell.
  • the mobile station 200 can avoid a situation in which the normal handover completion waiting timer expires and cannot be handed over to a new cell, thereby ensuring continuity of communication.
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 are diagrams showing a sequence example when the mobile station 200 is handed over from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell. Each process illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • the base station 100-1 determines whether there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2 (S170). For example, the cell control unit 106 of the base station 100-1 assigns the cell # 2 under the base station 100-1 to the cell # 2 under the base station 100-1 based on the location information of the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 stored in the internal memory. You may determine the presence or absence of an adjacent cell.
  • the base station 100-1 determines that there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2 (Yes in S170), the base station 100-1 transmits a configuration change notification to the adjacent cell (the adjacent base station 100-2 in the example of FIG. 20) ( S171).
  • the cell control unit 106 determines that there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2
  • the cell control unit 106 generates a configuration change notification including three parameters, and transmits the generated configuration change notification to the adjacent base via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. Transmit to station 100-2.
  • the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 of the adjacent base station 100-2 receives a configuration change notification from the base station 100-1, for example, it extracts three parameters included in the notification and outputs them to the cell control unit 106. To do.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 monitors the elapsed time from when the configuration change is received until the time indicated by “Wait Time”.
  • the mobile station 200-1 transmits a Measurement Report (S174), and the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover start instruction including three parameters to the mobile station 200-1 (S175 in FIG. 21).
  • the handover start instruction includes the cell ID of the new cell # 2 after the division.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover request to the base station 100-1 (or cell # 1) (S176).
  • the base station 100-1 approves the handover request and grants the handover request approval to the adjacent base station. Transmit to 100-2 (S177).
  • the neighboring base station 100-2 When the neighboring base station 100-2 receives the handover request approval from the base station 100-1, the neighboring base station 100-2 omits the three parameters and performs a normal handover (S178). For example, the adjacent base station 100-2 monitors the elapsed time from when the configuration change notification is received to the time indicated by “Wait Time”. The adjacent base station 100-2 compares the remaining time up to the time indicated by “Wait Time” with the handover completion waiting timer that is normally used, and if the remaining time is longer than the handover completion waiting timer, The remaining time is used as a monitoring timer. However, the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer when the handover completion waiting timer becomes longer than the remaining time.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 compares the remaining time with the handover completion waiting timer and uses the longer one as the monitoring timer. Thereby, for example, the handover time of the mobile station 200-1 to the new cell # 2 is guaranteed, and the continuity of communication can be ensured.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer.
  • Three parameters are omitted (S178).
  • the cell control unit 106 of the adjacent base station 100-2 may perform the handover completion waiting timer stored in the internal memory or the like and the remaining time of “Wait Time”.
  • the determination timing may be, for example, between S175 and S177.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 receives the Measurement Report from the mobile station 200-2 (S179), and transmits a handover start instruction to the new cell # 2 (S180).
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits normal parameters such as the cell ID of the cell # 2 to the mobile station 200-2 without transmitting the above three new parameters.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover request for the mobile station 200-2 to the base station 100-1 (S181), and receives a handover request approval from the base station 100-1.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform synchronization establishment processing for the new cell # 2 (S183 to S186).
  • the mobile station 200-1 performs a synchronization process in a mode (non-contention mode or contention mode) indicated by “Sync Mode”.
  • processing during cell integration As described above, when the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state based on the traffic information, the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 determines cell integration. The maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 also instructs the mobile station 200 located in the cell that disappears due to cell integration to execute handover.
  • the base station 100 determines the processing time required for cell integration, similarly to the processing at the time of cell division, and performs synchronization processing between the integrated base station 100 and the mobile station 200 based on the processing time. It is decided whether to carry out by the mobile station or by the mobile station. For example, when the processing time required for cell division is equal to or greater than a reference value, the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the base station. On the other hand, for example, when the processing time required for cell division is less than the reference value, the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the mobile station.
  • an example of a handover sequence including synchronization processing is divided into a case where synchronization processing is performed under the initiative of the base station (non-contention mode) and a case where synchronization processing is performed under the initiative of the mobile station (contention mode). explain.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a handover sequence when synchronization processing is performed in the non-contention mode (base station initiative) during cell integration.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example in which the cell integration decision is made by the base station 100.
  • Each process illustrated in FIG. 22 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example in which two cells # 1 and # 2 in the base station 100-1 are integrated into one cell # 1 by cell integration, and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are connected to the cell # 2. However, cell # 2 disappears due to cell integration and handover to cell # 1 is performed.
  • the base station 100-1 determines whether or not to integrate cells based on the traffic information (S190), and determines to integrate cells (Yes in S190). At this time, the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell integration is longer than the reference value, and also determines to perform synchronization processing led by the base station (non-contention mode). Then, the base station 100-1 acquires the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the location information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 (S122), and executes cell integration (S191). ).
  • base station 100-1 When cell # 2 is integrated into cell # 1 in base station 100-1, base station 100-1 that accommodates integrated cell # 1 transmits a synchronization establishment instruction request to mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. (S195, S199). Then, the base station 100-1 performs synchronization establishment processing led by the base station with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S196, S197, S200, S201). When the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 establish synchronization with the base station 100-1, they transmit a handover completion notification to the base station 100-1 (S198, S202).
  • the mobile station 200-1 or 200-1 does not receive the synchronization establishment instruction request, so that the cell integration process has failed in the base station 100-1. Can be detected.
  • the original cell before integration (cell # 2 in the example of FIG. 22) remains, so the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 roll back to the original cell. It becomes possible.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 when detecting the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 at the highest level, move to the base station 100-2. A handover or reconnection procedure may be performed.
  • FIG. 23 shows a sequence example in such a case. Each process illustrated in FIG. 23 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 After receiving the handover start instruction (S192, S193), the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 repeatedly transmit a synchronization establishment instruction request and wait for a response to the request during the period indicated by “Wait Time” ( S210, S211).
  • the synchronization establishment instruction request transmitted from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 is received by the base station 100-1 (S196, S200), and the base station 100-1 To the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S197, S201).
  • synchronization processing is performed between the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 and the base station 100-1 that accommodates the cell # 1, and when synchronization is established, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform handover.
  • a completion notification is transmitted to the base station 100-1 (S198, S202).
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 fail to perform the cell integration process on the base station 100-1 side by not receiving a response (S197, S201) to the synchronization establishment instruction request after the “Wait Time” period expires. Can be detected. Also in this case, since the original cells before integration remain, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can roll back to the original cells. However, when the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 detect the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 at the highest level, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are able to ) Or a reconnection procedure may be performed.
  • base station 100-1 that performs cell integration notifies configuration change notification to adjacent base station 100-2.
  • the configuration change notification includes three parameters “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 grasps that the cell integration is executed in the base station 100-1, and the normal handover is performed when the handover to the new cell after the integration under the base station 100-1 is executed. It is possible to invalidate completion waiting timers (eg, T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall in LTE). Therefore, the mobile station 200 can perform handover from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell after integration, and can ensure continuity of communication.
  • FIGS. 24 and 25 show sequence examples when handover is performed from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell (cell # 1) to be integrated with the cell. Each process illustrated in FIGS. 24 and 25 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.
  • the base station 100-1 After acquiring the location information, the base station 100-1 determines whether there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2 that disappears due to cell integration (S220). If there is a cell adjacent to cell # 2 (“There is an adjacent cell” in S220), base station 100-1 transmits a configuration change notification to adjacent base station 100-2 (S221). On the other hand, when there is no cell adjacent to cell # 2 (“No adjacent cell” in S220), base station 100-1 performs cell integration without transmitting a configuration change notification (S191).
  • the base station 100-1 invalidates the normal handover completion waiting timer (for example, LTE T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall ), substitutes the time indicated by “Wait Time”, and indicates “Sync Mode”.
  • the synchronization process is performed according to the mode to be used.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the remaining time as a monitoring timer while the remaining time of “Wait Time” is longer than the normal handover completion waiting timer.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the normal handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer when the normal handover completion waiting timer becomes longer than the remaining time.
  • the adjacent base station 100-2 uses a normal handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer. Therefore, the adjacent base station 100-2 performs normal handover (S227 to S229 in FIG. 25).
  • the base station 100-1 performs synchronization processing with the mobile station 200-1 in the mode specified by “Sync Mode”, and is normally in competition mode with the mobile station 200-2. Are synchronized (S332 to S335).
  • FIG. 26 shows a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10.
  • the mobile communication system 10 includes an eNB (evolved Node B) 100, UEs (User Equipment) 200-1 to 200-3, EMS / NMS 300, and E-SMLC (Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center) 560.
  • the eNB 100 is the base stations 100-1 and 100-2
  • the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are UEs 200-1 to 200-3
  • the location information server 500 is Each corresponds to E-SMLC560.
  • UE 200-1 is represented as a UE that could not acquire location information.
  • the operation example of the cell division and integration determination sequence will be described separately for a case where it is led by eNB (for example, FIG. 27) and a case where it is led by EMS / NMS (for example, FIG. 28).
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • FIG. 30 operation examples of a cell division processing sequence (for example, FIG. 32), a cell integration processing sequence (for example, FIG. 34), and a handover from a neighboring eNB (for example, FIGS. 36 and 37) will be described.
  • an operation example when cell division and integration processing failure has failed for example, FIG. 38) will be described.
  • UEs 200-1 to 200-3 may be described as the UE 200 unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a sequence example in the case of determining cell division and integration led by an eNB. Each process illustrated in FIG. 27 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination units 307 and 407, and the like.
  • the eNB 100 confirms the traffic load of each of the UEs 200-1 to 200-3 as needed, and the traffic load (or traffic information. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “traffic load”) and a threshold (for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state) (Threshold) are compared (S350).
  • the eNB 100 confirms a change in the relationship between the traffic load and the threshold (S351), and performs the processing from S352 onward when the traffic load exceeds the threshold, and performs the processing in S361 when the traffic load falls below the threshold.
  • the eNB 100 When the traffic load is equal to or greater than the threshold, the eNB 100 requests location information of all UEs 200 connected to the eNB 100 from the EMS / NMS 300 (S352). In this case, the eNB 100 may include identification information of all UEs 200 connected to the eNB 100 in the acquisition request.
  • the location information acquisition request is transmitted to the E-SMLC 560 via the EMS / NMS 300 (S353), and the E-SMLC 560 returns the location information to the EMS / NMS 300 (S354).
  • the EMS / NMS 300 When the EMS / NMS 300 receives location information from the E-SMLC 560 (S354), the EMS / NMS 300 checks whether the location information of all UEs 200 is included in the location information received from the E-SMLC 560, and the location information of all UEs 200 exists. Then, the process proceeds to S355. On the other hand, when the location information received from the E-SMLC 560 does not include the location information of all UEs 200, the EMS / NMS 300 proceeds to the process of S356.
  • the determination unit 307 of the EMS / NMS 300 determines that the location information of all UEs 200 is included if the identification information of all UEs received from the eNB 100 is included in the location information acquired from the E-SMLC 560. On the other hand, when the identification information of all UEs 200 is not included in the position information acquired from E-SMLC 560, determination unit 307 determines that the position information of all UEs 200 is not included.
  • the EMS / NMS 300 When the location information of all UEs 200 exists, the EMS / NMS 300 returns the location information of all UEs 200 received from the E-SMLC 560 to the eNB 100 (S355).
  • the EMS / NMS 300 returns the location information received from the E-SMLC 560 to the eNB 100, and the radio quality information used for the three-point survey for the UE 200-1 without the location information. Is transmitted to the eNB 100 (S356).
  • the eNB 100 receives the measurement instruction, transmits a radio quality measurement and transmission instruction to the UE 200-1 (S357), and the UE 200-1 transmits a Measurement Report to the eNB 100 (S358).
  • the eNB 100 transmits the instruction by the cell control unit 106, and the UE 200-1 measures the radio quality by the handover control unit 206.
  • the eNB 100 receives the Measurement Report and determines the location information of the UE 200-1 by the three-point survey method (S359).
  • the location information may be determined by the cell control unit 106 (or the mobile station location information management unit 109).
  • the eNB 100 When the eNB 100 receives the location information of all the UEs 200 in S355 or acquires the location information of all the UEs 200 in S355 and S359, the eNB 100 calculates the antenna configuration by cell division based on the location information of all the UEs 200 (S360). ). And in eNB100, UE200 used as the object made to hand over to the new cell after a division is determined (S362).
  • the handover target UE 200 is, for example, a UE that is connected to different cells before and after cell division.
  • the eNB 100 calculates an antenna configuration by cell integration (S361), and determines a handover target UE 200 (S362).
  • the handover target UE 200 is, for example, a UE that is connected to different cells before and after cell integration.
  • FIG. 28 shows a sequence example in the case of determining cell division and cell integration led by EMS / NMS. Each process shown in FIG. 28 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination units 307 and 407, and the like.
  • the EMS / NMS 300 confirms the traffic load of the eNB 100 as needed (S370, S371), compares the traffic load with a threshold (for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state threshold) (S372), and if the relationship changes,
  • the UE information of the currently connected UE 200 is acquired from the eNB 100 (S373, S374).
  • the UE information includes identification information of the UE 200.
  • the EMS / NMS 300 performs cell division by the processing after S353 when the traffic load changes to a threshold value or more. On the other hand, when the traffic load changes below the threshold, the EMS / NMS 300 performs cell integration by the process of S382.
  • the EMS / NMS 300 requests the location information of all UEs 200 from the E-SMLC 560, and the E-SMLC 560 returns the location information of the existing (held) UEs 200 (S354).
  • the EMS / NMS 300 when the location information of all UEs 200 acquired from the eNB 100 does not exist in the location information acquired from the E-SMLC 560, transmits to the eNB 100 a radio quality acquisition instruction based on three-point surveying (S375). In response to the acquisition instruction, the eNB 100 acquires the radio quality information of the UE 200-1 having no position information (S376, S377), and transmits the acquired position information to the EMS / NMS 300 (S378).
  • the EMS / NMS 300 determines the position information of the UE 200-1 by the three-point survey method (S380). For example, the mobile station location information management unit 306 (or determination unit 307) of the EMS / NMS 300 may determine the location information based on the three points of radio quality information acquired from the eNB 100.
  • the EMS / NMS 300 analyzes the bias based on the location information of all the UEs 200, and calculates the antenna configuration by cell division (S381).
  • the EMS / NMS 300 determines a handover target UE 200 (S383), transmits information on the antenna configuration and the handover target UE 200 to the eNB 100, and instructs the eNB 100 of the antenna configuration and the handover target UE 200 (S384).
  • the EMS / NMS 300 calculates an antenna configuration based on cell integration (S382), determines a handover target UE 200 (S383), and instructs the eNB 100 about the antenna configuration and the UE 200. (S384).
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10 including the MME 450.
  • the mobile communication system 10 further includes an MME 450 and an E-SMLC (Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center) 560.
  • the MME 450 corresponds to the access gateway 400 and the E-SMLC 560 of the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 30 shows a sequence example in the case of performing cell division and cell integration determination led by MME450. Each process illustrated in FIG. 30 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination units 307 and 407, and the like.
  • the eNB 100 checks the traffic load of the local station as needed, and compares a threshold (for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state threshold) with the traffic load (S350). And eNB100 will transmit a traffic state change notification to MME450, if the state transition to a load state (or congestion state) or a normal state (or relaxation state) is detected (S390).
  • a threshold for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state threshold
  • the MME 450 determines cell division or cell integration according to the content of the state change. That is, when the MME 450 detects a state change to the congestion state, the MME 450 determines cell division and requests the E-SMLC 560 for location information of all UEs 200 located in the eNB 100 (S391). In this case, since the MME 450 holds information on all the UEs 200 connected to the eNB 100, the MME 450 does not transmit an acquisition request for the location information of the UE 200 to the eNB 100.
  • the MME 450 instructs the eNB 100 to acquire the radio quality information of the UE 200-1 for which location information does not exist (S393).
  • the eNB 100 acquires radio quality from the UE 200-1 according to the acquisition instruction (S394, S395), and transmits it to the MME 450 (S396).
  • the MME 450 When the MME 450 receives the radio quality information from the eNB 100 (S394 to S396), the MME 450 determines the position of the UE 200-1 using the three-point surveying method for the radio quality information. Then, the MME 450 analyzes the UE bias based on the location information of all the UEs 200, and determines an antenna configuration that maximizes the cell capacity by cell division (S397).
  • the MME 450 determines the UE 200 to be handed over by cell division (S399) and notifies the eNB 100 (S400).
  • the MME 450 determines cell integration and calculates an antenna configuration (S398), determines a UE 200 that needs to move after cell integration (S399), and notifies the eNB 100 (S400). .
  • FIG. 31 illustrates a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10.
  • the example of FIG. 31 represents an example in which the cell ID of the cell in which the UE 200 is located is changed from “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 2” due to cell division.
  • FIG. 32 shows a sequence example of cell division processing. Each process illustrated in FIG. 32 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106 and the handover control unit 206.
  • ENB100 transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration with respect to UE200 connected to a new cell (S410).
  • the RRC Connection Reconfiguration indicates that, for example, the eNB 100 instructs the UE 200 to establish an RRC connection and connect to a new cell.
  • the RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”.
  • the RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes “New Cell ID” (or “New C-ID”), “Band”, and “Frequency” as other parameters.
  • the UE 200 Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200 waits for a synchronization process with the cell (“Cell # 2”) specified by the “New Cell ID”. That is, the UE 200 waits for the reception of RA Preamble Assignment from the eNB 100 that accommodates Cell # 2 for a period specified by “Wait Time” (S412).
  • the eNB 100 After transmitting the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the eNB 100 performs cell division by beam forming or the like for each antenna 101 (S411). The eNB 100 transmits the RA Preamble Assignment to the UE 200 connected to the new cell (“Cell # 2”) (S413).
  • the UE 200 that has received the RA Preamble Assignment transmits the RA Preamble instructed by the RA Preamble Assignment to the eNB 100 (S414).
  • the eNB 100 that has received the RA Preamble transmits an RA Response to the UE 200 (S415).
  • the RA response includes, for example, a timing adjustment value.
  • the UE 200 that has received the RA Response transmits the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to the eNB 100 based on the determination that the RRC Connection Reconfiguration processing has been completed (S416).
  • FIG. 33 shows a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10.
  • FIG. 33 illustrates an example in which “Cell # 2” disappears due to cell integration, and UE 200 located in “Cell # 2” hands over to “Cell # 1”.
  • FIG. 34 shows a sequence example of cell integration processing. Each process illustrated in FIG. 34 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106 and the handover control unit 206.
  • ENB 100 transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE 200 connected to “Cell # 2” (S420).
  • the UE 200 that has received the RRC Connection Reconfiguration transmits an RA Preamble to the cell (“Cell # 1”) specified by the “New Cell ID”, and waits for the reception of the RA Response (S422, S423). The UE 200 repeats this transmission and standby for the period specified by “Wait Time”.
  • ENB100 performs cell integration by beam forming etc. after transmitting RRC Connection Reconfiguration (S421). After cell integration, the eNB 100 receives the RA preamble transmitted from the UE 200 (S424), and transmits an RA response to the UE 200 (S425).
  • the UE 200 that has received the RA Response transmits the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to the eNB 100 based on the determination that the RRC Connection Reconfiguration processing has been completed (S426).
  • FIG. 35 shows a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10.
  • the cell ID is changed from “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 2” by cell division in the eNB 100-1.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates an example in which two UEs 200-1 and 200-2 are handed over from the neighboring eNB 100-2 to “Cell # 2.”
  • FIG. 36 shows an example of a handover sequence from the neighboring eNB 100-2.
  • Each process illustrated in FIG. 36 is performed by, for example, the neighboring eNB 100-2, the cell control unit 106 of the eNB 100-1 that performs cell division, the handover control unit 206, or the like.
  • the eNB 100-1 investigates neighboring neighboring eNBs when performing cell division, and discriminates the neighboring cells from the new cell after cell division. Then, the eNB 100-1 transmits the eNB Configuration Update to the adjacent eNB 100-2 that accommodates the cell adjacent to the new cell (S430).
  • eNB Configuration Update corresponds to, for example, the above-described configuration change notification (for example, S171 in FIG. 20).
  • the eNB Configuration Update includes two parameters, “Cell Deployment Indicator” and “Wait Time”. “Sync Mode” may be determined by the neighboring eNB 100-2, and “Sync Mode” may or may not be included in the eNB Configuration Update.
  • the adjacent eNB 100-2 When the adjacent eNB 100-2 receives the eNB Configuration Update, the adjacent eNB 100-2 starts a timer (or count) for the time specified by “Wait Time” (S431).
  • the UE 200-1 connected to the adjacent eNB 100-2 becomes a handover target ( S432).
  • the adjacent eNB 100-2 uses the timer specified by “Wait Time” as the monitoring timer.
  • the adjacent eNB 100-2 transmits a Handover Request to the eNB 100-1 that is performing the cell division process (S433).
  • the eNB 100-1 When the eNB 100-1 receives the Handover Request, the eNB 100-1 transmits a Handover Request Acknowledgment to the adjacent eNB 100-2 (S434).
  • the neighboring eNB 100-2 When the neighboring eNB 100-2 receives the Handover Request Acknowledgment, the neighboring eNB 100-2 transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the UE 200-1 (S435).
  • the RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three new parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. Among these, “Cell Deployment Indicator” and “Wait Time” may be included in the eNB Configuration Update (S430), and “Sync Mode” may be determined by the neighboring eNB 100-2. Alternatively, all the three new parameters included in the eNB Configuration Update (S430) may be used as they are in the adjacent eNB 100-2.
  • the UE 200-1 Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200-1 waits for the reception of the RA Preamble Assignment for the period specified by “Wait Time” (S436).
  • the UE 200-1 After cell division (S441), upon receiving the RA Preamble Assignment (S442), the UE 200-1 performs a synchronization process (S442 to S445).
  • the neighboring eNB 100-2 assumes that the UE 200-2 connected to the neighboring eNB 100-2 becomes a handover target (S437). In this case, the neighboring eNB 100-2 uses the handover completion waiting timers T RELOCprep and TX2 RELO Coverall having a remaining time longer than “Wait Time” as monitoring timers. At this time, the neighboring eNB 100-2 transmits a Handover Request to the eNB 100-1 that is performing the cell division process (S438).
  • the neighboring eNB 100-2 When the neighboring eNB 100-2 receives the Handover Request Acknowledgment from the eNB 100-1 (S439), the neighboring eNB 100-2 transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the UE 200-1 (S440).
  • the UE 200-2 When receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200-2 waits for the reception of the RA Preamble Assignment during the handover completion waiting timer T304.
  • the UE 200-1 receives the RA Preamble Assignment (S450 in FIG. 37), and performs synchronization processing (S451 to S453).
  • FIG. 38 shows a sequence example in the case where handover is not completed when the cell division process fails. Each process shown in FIG. 38 is performed by the cell control unit 106 and the handover control unit 206, for example.
  • ENB 100-1 transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE 200-1 connected to the new cell (“Cell # 2”) (S460).
  • the UE 200-1 Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200-1 waits for the synchronization process for the period indicated by “Wait Time” (S461).
  • the eNB 100-1 that performs the cell division processing cannot transmit the RA Preamble Assignment in the “Wait Time” due to a processing load or the like.
  • the period indicated by “Wait Time” expires without receiving the RA Preamble Assignment during the “Wait Time” period (S462).
  • the UE 200-1 detects that the cell division has failed in the eNB 100-1 by not receiving the RA Preamble Assignment during the “Wait Time” period. In this case, the UE 200-1 resumes (or rolls back) communication with the eNB 100-1 connected immediately before. The UE 200-1 resumes communication with the eNB 100 without performing a normal reconnection procedure. The eNB 100-1 suspends the communication process with the UE 200-1, and responds to the connection resumption from the UE 200-1 (S463).
  • the UE 200-1 can return to the communication with the eNB 100-1 accommodating “Cell # 1” without performing the reconnection procedure after the “Wait Time” period expires.
  • the base station 100 (or cell) can divide or integrate the frequency (or carrier) f1 used into two frequencies f1 and f2. is there.
  • the mobile station 200 may perform a handover due to a change in frequency.
  • the maintenance system 300 acquires traffic information from the base station 100, acquires position information from the position information server 500, and configures the antenna configuration based on the traffic information and position information. The change from the first configuration to the second configuration may be determined.
  • the base station 100 transmits three parameters (“Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”) to the mobile station 200 to be handed over.
  • the “frequency” may be used instead of the “cell” described in the second embodiment, and the mobile communication system 10 can implement what has been described in the second embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately control the cell capacity and ensure continuity of communication.
  • the configuration of the antenna it is possible to divide or integrate the communication method into the first method and the second method in one base station 100 (or cell).
  • Communication methods include LTE and 5G.
  • the mobile station 200 may perform handover by changing the communication method. Even in this case, the mobile communication system 10 can be replaced with the “communication method” instead of the “cell” described in the second embodiment. Then, what has been described in the second embodiment can be implemented.
  • the mobile communication system 10 performs the second implementation. It becomes possible to carry out what has been described in the form.
  • Non-Patent Document 4 includes, for example, a pattern that allows different antennas for transmission and reception. When such a pattern is executed by cell division, the pattern of the second embodiment described above is used. Examples are applicable.
  • FIG 39 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of the base station 100
  • FIG. 40 is a mobile station 200
  • FIG. 41 is a hardware configuration of the maintenance system 300, the access gateway 400, or the location information server 500.
  • the base station 100 includes an antenna 101, a CPU 150, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 151, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 152, a memory 153, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 154, a wireless processing unit 155, An IF (Interface) 156 is provided.
  • the CPU 150 reads out a program stored in the ROM 151, loads it into the RAM 152, and executes the loaded program, whereby the control signal processing unit 105, the cell control unit 106, the antenna control unit 107, the traffic information management unit 108, the mobile station The functions of the position information management unit 109 and the transmission power control unit 111 are executed. Therefore, for example, the CPU 150 is connected to the control signal processing unit 105, the cell control unit 106, the antenna control unit 107, the traffic information management unit 108, the mobile station location information management unit 109, and the transmission power control unit 111 in the second embodiment. Correspond.
  • the DSP 154 executes functions of the reception multiple access processing unit 103, the demodulation / decoding unit 104, the encoding / modulation unit 112, and the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 150. Therefore, the DSP 154 corresponds to, for example, the reception multiple access processing unit 103, the demodulation / decoding unit 104, the encoding / modulation unit 112, and the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 in the second embodiment.
  • the memory 153 corresponds to, for example, the traffic information management unit 108 and the mobile station location information management unit 109 in the second embodiment.
  • the wireless processing unit 155 corresponds to the reception wireless unit 102 and the transmission wireless unit 114.
  • the IF 156 corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 in the second embodiment.
  • the base station 100 includes two CPUs 150, one corresponding to the control signal processing unit 105, the cell control unit 106, the traffic information management unit 108, the mobile station location information management unit 109, and the transmission power control unit 111.
  • the other one may correspond to the antenna control unit 107.
  • the mobile station 200 includes an antenna 201, a CPU 250, a ROM 251, a RAM 252, a memory 253, a DSP 254, and a wireless processing unit 255.
  • the CPU 250 reads out the program stored in the ROM 251 and loads it into the RAM 252 and executes the loaded program, whereby the control signal extraction unit 205, the handover control unit 206, the synchronization processing unit 207, the rollback control unit 208, the control signal The functions of the processing unit 209 and the transmission power control unit 210 are executed.
  • the CPU 250 corresponds to, for example, the control signal extraction unit 205, the handover control unit 206, the synchronization processing unit 207, the rollback control unit 208, the control signal processing unit 209, and the transmission power control unit 210 in the second embodiment.
  • the DSP 254 corresponds to, for example, the reception multiple access processing unit 203, the demodulation / decoding unit 204, the encoding / modulation unit 211, and the transmission multiple access processing unit 212 in the second embodiment.
  • the wireless processing unit 255 corresponds to, for example, the reception wireless unit 202 and the transmission wireless unit 213 in the second embodiment.
  • the maintenance system 300 includes a CPU 350, a ROM 351, a RAM 352, a memory 353, and an IF 354.
  • the CPU 350 reads out the program stored in the ROM 351, loads it into the RAM 352, and executes the loaded program, whereby the signal analysis units 302 and 305, the traffic information management unit 303, the mobile station location information management unit 306, and the determination unit 307. Realize the function.
  • the CPU 350 corresponds to, for example, the signal analysis units 302 and 305, the traffic information management unit 303, the mobile station location information management unit 306, and the determination unit 307 in the second embodiment.
  • the memory 353 corresponds to, for example, the traffic information management unit 303 and the mobile station location information management unit 306 in the second embodiment.
  • the IF 354 corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for the location information server in the second embodiment.
  • the access gateway 400 includes a CPU 460, a ROM 461, a RAM 462, a memory 463, and an IF 464.
  • the CPU 460 reads out the program stored in the ROM 461, loads it into the RAM 462, and executes the loaded program, whereby the signal analysis units 402 and 405, the traffic information management unit 403, the mobile station location information management unit 406, and the determination unit 407. Realize the function.
  • the CPU 460 corresponds to, for example, the signal analysis units 402 and 405, the traffic information management unit 403, the mobile station location information management unit 406, and the determination unit 407 in the second embodiment.
  • the memory 463 corresponds to, for example, the traffic information management unit 403 and the mobile station location information management unit 406 in the second embodiment.
  • the IF 464 corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for base stations and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for location information servers in the second embodiment.
  • the location information server 500 includes a CPU 510, a ROM 511, a RAM 512, a memory 513, and an IF 514.
  • the position information of the mobile station 200 is stored in the memory 513 via the IF 514 under the control of the CPU 510.
  • the CPU 510 appropriately reads the position information of the mobile station 200 stored in the memory 513 and transmits it to the maintenance system 300 via the IF 514.
  • Mobile communication system 100 (100-1, 100-2): Base station apparatus (eNB) 101: Antenna 102: Reception radio unit 105: Control signal processing unit 106: Cell division / integration control unit 107: Antenna control unit 108: Traffic information management unit 109: Mobile station location information management unit 110: TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 114: Transmission radio unit 120: AAS 121: BBU 125-1, 125-2, ...: Transceiver units 126-1, 126-2, ...: Antenna (or antenna element) 200 (200-1, 200-2): Mobile station apparatus 206: Handover control unit 207 for cell division / integration: Synchronization processing unit 208: Rollback control unit 250: CPU 300: Maintenance system (EMS / NMS) 303: Traffic information management unit 306: Mobile station location information management unit 307: Cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit 350: CPU 400: Access gateway 403: Traffic information management unit 406: Mobile station location information Management unit 406

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

This communication apparatus connectable to a position information server that manages position information about a mobile station apparatus is provided with: a transmission/reception unit that receives, from the mobile station apparatus, traffic information about traffic between a base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus, and receives the position information of the mobile station apparatus from the position information server; and a determination unit that determines changing of the configuration of an antenna from a first configuration to a second configuration at the base station apparatus on the basis of the traffic information and the position information, and transmits an instruction to change to the second configuration to the base station apparatus via the transmission/reception unit.

Description

通信装置、基地局装置、移動通信システム、通信方法、及び移動局装置COMMUNICATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE

 本発明は、通信装置、基地局装置、移動通信システム、通信方法、及び移動局装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a communication device, a base station device, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station device.

 現在、標準化団体である3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project)では、大容量で高速の無線ネットワークシステムの技術として、LTE(Long Term Evolution)及びLTE-Advancedの後継システムが検討されている。このようなシステムは第5世代移動通信(5G:the 5th Generation mobile communication)と呼ばれている。また、日本においてはLTE-Advanced技術の一つであるCA(Carrier Aggregation)を用いたサービスが2015年より本格的に導入され、200Mbpsを超えた伝送速度で無線通信が可能となっている。 Currently, 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which is a standardization organization, is studying LTE (Long Term Evolution) and LTE-Advanced successor systems as high-capacity and high-speed wireless network system technologies. Such a system is called fifth generation mobile communication (5G: the: 5th Generation mobile communication). In Japan, a service using CA (Carrier Aggregation), which is one of LTE-Advanced technologies, was introduced in earnest in 2015, and wireless communication is possible at a transmission rate exceeding 200 Mbps.

 このような無線通信に関してアクティブアンテナアレイシステム(AAS(Active Antenna Array System)、以下「AAS」と称する場合がある。)と呼ばれる技術が注目されている。AASは、例えば、アンテナアレイとアクティブ送信ユニットアレイとが一体化された基地局システムである。例えば、アンテナに無線信号の送受信機能が一体化されて基地局装置内に搭載されることで、高品質なサービスエリアを実現でき、基地局装置の小型化や電力効率の向上などを実現することが可能となる。 Regarding such wireless communication, a technique called an active antenna array system (AAS (Active Antenna Array System), hereinafter may be referred to as “AAS”) has attracted attention. AAS is, for example, a base station system in which an antenna array and an active transmission unit array are integrated. For example, a radio signal transmission / reception function is integrated with an antenna and installed in a base station device, so that a high-quality service area can be realized, and the base station device can be downsized and power efficiency can be improved. Is possible.

 AASでは、例えば、垂直方向へのビームフォーミングによって1つのセクタを複数セルへ分割(Cell splitting)させたり、チルト制御によって複数のキャリアを個別に制御(Carrier-specific tilting)したりすることも可能となる。 In AAS, for example, one sector can be divided into a plurality of cells by cell forming in the vertical direction (Cell に よ っ て splitting), or a plurality of carriers can be individually controlled (Carrier-specific tilting) by tilt control. Become.

 他方、無線通信についてはハンドオーバと呼ばれる技術もある。ハンドオーバによって、例えば、移動局が接続する基地局(又はセル)を変更することで、移動局における通信の継続性を確保することが可能となる。ハンドオーバに関しては、基地局が保持するハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(LTEではTRELOCprepとTX2RELOCoverall)や、移動局へ通知されるハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(LTEではT304)が設定される場合がある。ハンドオーバの際にこのようなタイマが設定されることで、例えば、ハンドオーバ前に基地局において無線リソースが確保され続けることを防止することが可能となる。基地局と移動局においてハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマの有効期間中にハンドオーバが完了しない場合、ハンドオーバが失敗となる。 On the other hand, there is a technique called handover for radio communication. By performing handover, for example, by changing the base station (or cell) to which the mobile station is connected, it is possible to ensure continuity of communication in the mobile station. Regarding handover, a handover completion waiting timer (T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall in LTE) held by the base station and a handover completion waiting timer notified to the mobile station (T304 in LTE) may be set. By setting such a timer at the time of handover, for example, it is possible to prevent radio resources from being continuously reserved in the base station before the handover. If the handover is not completed in the effective period of the handover completion waiting timer in the base station and the mobile station, the handover fails.

3GPP TR 37.840 V12.1.0 (2013-02)3GPP TR 37.840 V12.1.0 (2013-02) 3GPP TS 36.331 V9.1.0 (2009-12)3GPP TS 36.331 V9.1.0 (2009-12) 3GPP TS 36.423 V8.3.0 (2008-09)3GPP TS 36.423 V8.3.0 (2008-09) Nokia Solutions and Networks Active Antenna Systems: A step-change in base station site performance, NSN White paper, October 2013.Nokia Solutions and Networks Active Antenna Systems: A step-change in base station site performance, NSN White paper, October 2013.

 しかし、1つの基地局に対して複数の移動局がハンドオーバを行う場合がある。この場合、基地局ではハンドオーバ前と比較して負荷が上昇する可能性がある。また、移動局は運用開始前の基地局へハンドオーバする場合もある。この場合、移動局はハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマの有効期間内に当該基地局へのハンドオーバを完了することができない可能性がある。 However, there are cases where multiple mobile stations perform handover for one base station. In this case, the load may increase at the base station as compared to before the handover. In addition, the mobile station may be handed over to the base station before starting operation. In this case, the mobile station may not be able to complete handover to the base station within the valid period of the handover completion waiting timer.

 そこで、一開示は、セル容量を適切に制御するようにした基地局装置、通信装置、移動通信システム、通信方法、及び移動局装置を提供することにある。 Therefore, one disclosure is to provide a base station apparatus, a communication apparatus, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station apparatus that appropriately control the cell capacity.

 また、一開示は、通信の継続性を確保するようにした基地局装置、通信装置、移動通信システム、通信方法、及び移動局装置を提供することにある。 Also, one disclosure is to provide a base station device, a communication device, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station device that ensure continuity of communication.

 一態様によれば、移動局装置の位置情報を管理する位置情報サーバと接続可能な通信装置において、基地局装置と前記移動局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を前記基地局装置から受信し、前記移動局装置の前記位置情報を前記位置情報サーバから受信する送受信部と、前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいて前記基地局装置におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することを決定し、前記第2の構成への変更指示を、前記送受信部を介して前記基地局装置へ送信する判定部とを備える。 According to one aspect, in a communication device connectable with a location information server that manages location information of a mobile station device, traffic information relating to traffic between a base station device and the mobile station device is received from the base station device, A transmitting / receiving unit that receives the location information of the mobile station device from the location information server, and a configuration of an antenna in the base station device is changed from a first configuration to a second configuration based on the traffic information and the location information And a determination unit that transmits an instruction to change to the second configuration to the base station device via the transmission / reception unit.

 一開示によれば、セル容量を適切に制御するようにした基地局装置、通信装置、移動通信システム、通信方法、及び移動局装置を提供することができる。また、一開示によれば、通信の継続性を確保するようにした基地局装置、通信装置、移動通信システム、通信方法、及び移動局装置を提供することができる。 According to one disclosure, it is possible to provide a base station apparatus, a communication apparatus, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station apparatus that appropriately control the cell capacity. Further, according to one disclosure, it is possible to provide a base station apparatus, a communication apparatus, a mobile communication system, a communication method, and a mobile station apparatus that ensure communication continuity.

図1は移動通信システムの構成例を表す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system. 図2は移動通信システムの構成例を表す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system. 図3(A)はセル分割、図3(B)はセル統合の例を夫々表す図である。FIG. 3A shows an example of cell division, and FIG. 3B shows an example of cell integration. 図4は基地局装置の構成例を表す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the base station apparatus. 図5は移動局装置の構成例を表す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile station apparatus. 図6は保守システムの構成例を表す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the maintenance system. 図7はアクセスゲートウェイの構成例を表す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an access gateway. 図8はセル分割処理フローの例を表す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing flow. 図9はセル分割処理フローの例を表す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing flow. 図10はセル分割処理フローの例を表す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing flow. 図11はセル統合処理フローの例を表す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow. 図12はセル統合処理フローの例を表す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow. 図13はセル統合処理フローの例を表す図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing flow. 図14はセル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division. 図15はセル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division. 図16はハンドオーバ失敗時のシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sequence at the time of handover failure. 図17はセル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division. 図18はセル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell division. 図19はハンドオーバ失敗時のシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sequence at the time of handover failure. 図20は他局からのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station. 図21は他局からのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station. 図22はセル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell integration. 図23はセル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence by cell integration. 図24は他局からのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station. 図25は他局からのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from another station. 図26は移動通信システムの構成例を表す図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system. 図27はセル分割/統合判断シーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division / integration determination sequence. 図28はセル分割/統合判断シーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division / integration determination sequence. 図29は移動通信システムの構成例を表す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system. 図30はセル分割/統合判断シーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division / integration determination sequence. 図31はセル分割の例を表す図である。FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of cell division. 図32はセル分割処理シーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell division processing sequence. 図33はセル統合の例を表す図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of cell integration. 図34はセル統合処理シーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cell integration processing sequence. 図35は隣接eNBからのハンドオーバの例を表す図である。FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of handover from a neighboring eNB. 図36は隣接eNBからのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from a neighboring eNB. 図37は隣接eNBからのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover sequence from a neighboring eNB. 図38はロールバックシーケンスの例を表す図である。FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rollback sequence. 図39は基地局装置のハードウェア構成を表す図である。FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of the base station apparatus. 図40は移動局装置のハードウェア構成例を表す図である。FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of the mobile station apparatus. 図41は保守システム、アクセスゲートウェイ、又は位置情報サーバのハードウェア構成例を表す図である。FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of a maintenance system, an access gateway, or a location information server.

 以下、本実施の形態について図面を参照して詳細に説明する。本明細書における課題及び実施例は一例であり、本願の権利範囲を限定するものではない。特に、記載の表現が異なっていたとしても技術的に同等であれば、異なる表現であっても本願の技術を適用可能であり、権利範囲を限定するものではない。 Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Problems and examples in the present specification are merely examples, and do not limit the scope of rights of the present application. In particular, even if the described expressions are different, as long as they are technically equivalent, the techniques of the present application can be applied even if the expressions are different, and the scope of rights is not limited.

 また、本明細書で使用している用語や本明細書に記載した技術的内容は、3GPPなどにおいて通信に関する規格として仕様書に記載された用語や技術的内容が適宜用いられてもよい。このような仕様書の一例としては、上述した非特許文献1から3などがある。 In addition, as terms used in the present specification and technical contents described in the present specification, terms and technical contents described in the specification as communication standards in 3GPP and the like may be used as appropriate. Examples of such specifications include Non-Patent Documents 1 to 3 described above.

 [第1の実施の形態]
 図1は第1の実施の形態における移動通信システム10の構成例を表す図である。移動通信システム10は、基地局装置100、移動局装置200、位置情報サーバ500、及び通信装置600を備える。
[First Embodiment]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a mobile communication system 10 according to the first embodiment. The mobile communication system 10 includes a base station device 100, a mobile station device 200, a location information server 500, and a communication device 600.

 基地局装置100は移動局装置200と無線通信を行う。また、位置情報サーバ500は、基地局装置100と移動局装置200との間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を管理する。通信装置600は、位置情報サーバ500と接続可能となっている。 The base station device 100 performs wireless communication with the mobile station device 200. The location information server 500 manages traffic information related to traffic between the base station device 100 and the mobile station device 200. The communication device 600 can be connected to the position information server 500.

 通信装置600は、送受信部610と判定部620を備える。 The communication device 600 includes a transmission / reception unit 610 and a determination unit 620.

 送受信部610は、基地局装置100と移動局装置200との間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を基地局装置100から受信する。また、送受信部610は移動局装置200の位置情報を位置情報サーバ500から受信する。 The transmission / reception unit 610 receives traffic information regarding traffic between the base station apparatus 100 and the mobile station apparatus 200 from the base station apparatus 100. Further, the transmission / reception unit 610 receives the position information of the mobile station device 200 from the position information server 500.

 判定部620は、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいて基地局装置100におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することを決定し、送受信部610を介して第2の構成への変更指示を基地局装置100へ送信する。 The determination unit 620 determines to change the antenna configuration in the base station apparatus 100 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information, and moves to the second configuration via the transmission / reception unit 610. Is transmitted to the base station apparatus 100.

 このように本第1の実施の形態では、通信装置600ではトラフィック情報と位置情報によよって、例えば、基地局装置100に接続された移動局装置200の偏りなどを分析することが可能となる。そして、通信装置600では、このような偏りに対して最適なセル分割やセル統合となり得る基地局装置100におけるアンテナの構成を決定することが可能となる。 As described above, in the first embodiment, the communication apparatus 600 can analyze, for example, the bias of the mobile station apparatus 200 connected to the base station apparatus 100 based on the traffic information and the position information. . Communication apparatus 600 can determine the antenna configuration in base station apparatus 100 that can achieve optimal cell division or cell integration against such a bias.

 例えば、トラフィック情報や位置情報に基づいて基地局装置100配下のセルが分割されることで、基地局装置100配下のセル数が増大し、制御可能な(又は収容可能)移動局装置200の個数も増大する。これにより、例えば、基地局装置100のセル容量が適切に拡大され、基地局装置100での輻輳状態に対応することも可能となる。 For example, the number of cells under the base station apparatus 100 is increased by dividing the cells under the base station apparatus 100 based on traffic information and location information, and the number of controllable (or accommodable) mobile station apparatuses 200 is increased. Also increases. Thereby, for example, the cell capacity of the base station apparatus 100 is appropriately expanded, and it becomes possible to cope with the congestion state in the base station apparatus 100.

 また、例えば、通信装置600では基地局装置100配下のセル統合をトラフィック情報や位置情報に基づいて決定することも可能である。この場合、基地局装置100配下のセル数が減少するため、セル数が増大することによるセル間干渉やハンドオーバの頻発などを抑止することが可能となる。これにより、例えば、基地局装置100のセル容量を適切に減少させることも可能となる。 For example, in the communication apparatus 600, cell integration under the base station apparatus 100 can be determined based on traffic information and position information. In this case, since the number of cells under the base station apparatus 100 decreases, it is possible to suppress inter-cell interference and frequent handovers due to the increase in the number of cells. Thereby, for example, the cell capacity of the base station apparatus 100 can be appropriately reduced.

 以上から、本第1の実施の形態における移動通信システム10は基地局装置100配下のセルの容量を適切に制御することが可能となる。 From the above, the mobile communication system 10 in the first embodiment can appropriately control the capacity of cells under the base station apparatus 100.

 なお、上述した例は通信装置600においてアンテナの構成を変更することを決定した。例えば、基地局装置100においてアンテナの構成を変更することを決定してもよい。この場合、基地局装置100には、トラフィック情報管理部170、送受信部171、制御部172を備える。 In the above-described example, it has been decided to change the antenna configuration in the communication device 600. For example, the base station apparatus 100 may determine to change the antenna configuration. In this case, the base station apparatus 100 includes a traffic information management unit 170, a transmission / reception unit 171, and a control unit 172.

 トラフィック情報管理部170は、移動局装置200と基地局装置100との間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を取得する。送受信部171は、位置情報サーバ500が管理する移動局装置200の位置情報を、通信装置600を介して位置情報サーバ500から受信する。制御部172は、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更する。 The traffic information management unit 170 acquires traffic information related to traffic between the mobile station device 200 and the base station device 100. The transmission / reception unit 171 receives the location information of the mobile station device 200 managed by the location information server 500 from the location information server 500 via the communication device 600. The control unit 172 changes the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information.

 この場合でも、例えば、基地局装置100ではアンテナの構成の変更によるセルの分割や統合を、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいて決定することが可能となり、セル数を適切に増加させたり減少させたりすることも可能で、セル容量を適切に制御することが可能となる。 Even in this case, for example, the base station apparatus 100 can determine cell division or integration by changing the antenna configuration based on traffic information and location information, and can appropriately increase or decrease the number of cells. It is also possible to control the cell capacity appropriately.

 なお、基地局装置100ではアンテナの構成を変更することになるが、このような変更によって移動局装置200においてハンドオーバが生ずる場合がある。本第1の実施の形態においては、基地局装置100は新規の3つのパラメータを含むハンドオーバ開始指示を移動局装置200へ送信する。新規の3つのパラメータは、例えば、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」である。 In addition, although the antenna configuration is changed in the base station apparatus 100, a handover may occur in the mobile station apparatus 200 due to such a change. In the first embodiment, base station apparatus 100 transmits a handover start instruction including three new parameters to mobile station apparatus 200. The three new parameters are, for example, “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”.

 「Cell Deployment Indicator」は、例えば、セルが分割又は統合されることを示す。また、「Wait Time」は、例えば、基地局装置100においてセルの分割処理又はセルの統合処理を開始してから終了するまでの処理時間(又は最大処理時間)を示す。さらに、「Sync Mode」は、例えば、同期処理を基地局装置主導で行なうのか移動局主導で行うのかを示す。 “Cell Deployment Indicator” indicates, for example, that the cell is divided or integrated. “Wait Time” indicates, for example, the processing time (or maximum processing time) from the start to the end of cell division processing or cell integration processing in the base station apparatus 100. Furthermore, “Sync Mode” indicates, for example, whether the synchronization processing is performed by the base station device or the mobile station.

 このような3つのパラメータにより、例えば、移動局装置200ではハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマとして設定された時間(例えばT304)を無効化し、「Wait Time」で示されたタイマを用いてハンドオーバ処理を行うことが可能となる。これにより、例えば、移動局装置200では、ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ満了によって分割後のセルへハンドオーバができないなどの事態を回避することができ、当該基地局装置100への接続にかかる時間が保証される。従って、移動局装置200はセル分割やセル統合後のセルへのハンドオーバが保証され、本移動通信システム10では通信の継続性を確保することが可能となる。 With such three parameters, for example, the mobile station apparatus 200 can invalidate the time set as a handover completion waiting timer (eg, T304) and perform the handover process using the timer indicated by “Wait Time”. It becomes possible. As a result, for example, the mobile station apparatus 200 can avoid a situation in which the handover to the divided cell cannot be performed due to the expiration of the handover completion waiting timer, and the time required for connection to the base station apparatus 100 is guaranteed. . Therefore, the mobile station apparatus 200 is guaranteed to be handed over to the cell after cell division or cell integration, and the mobile communication system 10 can ensure continuity of communication.

 [第2の実施の形態]
 次に第2の実施の形態について説明する。最初に本第2の実施の形態で説明する用語について説明する。
[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. First, terms used in the second embodiment will be described.

 <用語の説明>
 セルとは、例えば、移動局装置(以下、「移動局」と称する場合がある)によって(セル)識別情報によりユニークに識別可能なネットワークオブジェクトである。セルは、例えば、1つの基地局装置(以下、「基地局」と称する場合がある)によって形成されたサービスエリアであってもよいし、当該サービスエリアと基地局とを併せたものであってもよい。本第2の実施の形態では、セルと基地局とを区別しないで同じ意味で用いる場合がある。
<Explanation of terms>
A cell is, for example, a network object that can be uniquely identified by (cell) identification information by a mobile station apparatus (hereinafter also referred to as “mobile station”). The cell may be, for example, a service area formed by one base station apparatus (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “base station”), or a combination of the service area and the base station. Also good. In the second embodiment, a cell and a base station may be used interchangeably without being distinguished.

 AASとは、例えば、アンテナアレイとアクティブ送信ユニットアレイとが一体化された基地局システムである。又は、AASとは、例えば、アンテナに無線信号の送受信機能が一体化されて基地局装置内に搭載されたシステムのことである。AASは上述した非特許文献1などに記載されている。 AAS is, for example, a base station system in which an antenna array and an active transmission unit array are integrated. Alternatively, AAS is a system in which a radio signal transmission / reception function is integrated with an antenna and mounted in a base station apparatus, for example. AAS is described in Non-Patent Document 1 described above.

 アンテナ再構成とは、例えば、基地局におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へと変更することである。例えば、アンテナ再構成の一例がAASであって、アンテナの構成を変更するものであればAAS以外の方式であってもよい。第2の実施の形態では、AASを用いた基地局について説明する場合もあるが、AAS以外の方式でアンテナの構成を変更する基地局であっても第2の実施の形態は実施可能である。 The antenna reconfiguration is, for example, changing the antenna configuration at the base station from the first configuration to the second configuration. For example, an example of antenna reconfiguration is AAS, and any method other than AAS may be used as long as the configuration of the antenna is changed. In the second embodiment, a base station using AAS may be described, but the second embodiment can be implemented even for a base station that changes the antenna configuration by a method other than AAS. .

 なお、上述した非特許文献4では、AASとして6つのパターンが記載されている。例えば、垂直方向へのビームフォーミングによってセルを分割するCell splitting、チルト角の制御によりキャリア(又は周波数)を分割するCarrier-specific tiltingなどがある。アンテナ再構成により、セルの分割や統合、キャリアの分割や統合などが可能となる。アンテナ再構成のパターンとしては、上述した非特許文献4に記載された6つのパターンが含まれてもよい。 Note that in Non-Patent Document 4 described above, six patterns are described as AAS. For example, there are cell splitting that divides cells by beam forming in the vertical direction, carrier-specific tilting that divides carriers (or frequencies) by controlling the tilt angle, and the like. Antenna reconfiguration enables cell division and integration, carrier division and integration, and the like. The antenna reconfiguration patterns may include the six patterns described in Non-Patent Document 4 described above.

 上述した用語の説明は一例である。これらの用語は、例えば、3GPPなどの通信規格を規定する仕様書や通信規格に関連したホワイトペーパーなどの文献において記載されている用語やその意味が用いられてもよい。 The explanation of the above term is an example. As these terms, for example, terms and their meanings described in documents such as specifications that define communication standards such as 3GPP and white papers related to communication standards may be used.

 <移動通信システムの構成例>
 次に、本第2の実施の形態における移動通信システムの構成例について説明する。図2は移動通信システム10の構成例を表す図である。
<Configuration example of mobile communication system>
Next, a configuration example of the mobile communication system in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10.

 移動通信システム10は、基地局装置(以下、「基地局」と称する場合がある)100-1,100-2、移動局装置(以下、「移動局」と称する場合がある)200-1,200-2を備える。 The mobile communication system 10 includes base station devices (hereinafter also referred to as “base stations”) 100-1 and 100-2, mobile station devices (hereinafter also referred to as “mobile stations”) 200-1, 200-2.

 また、移動通信システム10は、EMS/NMS(Element Management System/Network Management System)(以下、「保守システム」と称する場合がある)300、アクセスゲートウェイ400、位置情報サーバ500を備える。 The mobile communication system 10 includes an EMS / NMS (Element Management System / Network Management System) 300 (hereinafter also referred to as “maintenance system”), an access gateway 400, and a location information server 500.

 なお、第1の実施の形態における通信装置600は、例えば、保守システム300又はアクセスゲートウェイ400に対応する。 Note that the communication device 600 in the first embodiment corresponds to the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400, for example.

 基地局100-1,100-2は、例えば、自局のサービスエリアに在圏する移動局200-1,200-2と無線通信を行う無線通信装置である。 The base stations 100-1 and 100-2 are wireless communication devices that perform wireless communication with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 located in the service area of the local station, for example.

 また、各基地局100-1,100-2は、アンテナの構成を変更することで、各基地局100-1,100-2配下のセルを分割又は統合することが可能である。このような分割は、例えば、AASにより実現することができる。図2の例では、基地局100-1配下の1つのセルが2つのセルに分割される例が表されている。 Also, the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 can divide or integrate cells under the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 by changing the antenna configuration. Such division can be realized by AAS, for example. In the example of FIG. 2, an example is shown in which one cell under the base station 100-1 is divided into two cells.

 さらに、基地局100-1,100-2は、各移動局200-1,200-2との無線区間においてトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を取得する。トラフィック情報としては、例えば、単位時間あたりに送受信したパケット数やビット数(又はデータ量)、無線リソースの割り当て量、再送回数や再送率、ハンドオーバ成功率などであってもよい。基地局100-1は各移動局200-1,200-2との無線通信を監視することでトラフィック情報を取得する。基地局100-1は取得したトラフィック情報を定期的又は要求に応じて保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。 Further, the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 acquire traffic information related to traffic in the radio section with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. The traffic information may be, for example, the number of packets transmitted / received per unit time or the number of bits (or data amount), the amount of radio resources allocated, the number of retransmissions, the retransmission rate, the handover success rate, and the like. The base station 100-1 acquires traffic information by monitoring wireless communication with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. The base station 100-1 transmits the acquired traffic information to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400 periodically or upon request.

 さらに、基地局100-1,100-2は、保守システム300からアンテナ構成の変更指示を受け取ることができる。基地局100-1,100-2は当該指示に従ってアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更する。アンテナの構成を変更することで(又はアンテナを再構成することで)、各基地局100-1,100-2は配下の1つのセルを2つのセルに分割したり、2つのセルを統合したりすることが可能となる。 Further, the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 can receive an antenna configuration change instruction from the maintenance system 300. Base stations 100-1 and 100-2 change the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration in accordance with the instruction. By changing the antenna configuration (or by reconfiguring the antenna), each base station 100-1, 100-2 divides one cell under control into two cells, or integrates the two cells. It becomes possible to do.

 この場合、基地局100-1,100-2は、アンテナ構成の変更に伴ってハンドオーバさせる移動局200-1,200-2の情報(又は指示)を保守システム300から受け取る。図2の例では、基地局100-1は分割後の新規セルに在圏する移動局200-2がハンドオーバ対象の移動局として指示される。 In this case, the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 receive from the maintenance system 300 information (or instructions) of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over in accordance with the change of the antenna configuration. In the example of FIG. 2, in the base station 100-1, the mobile station 200-2 located in the new cell after the division is instructed as a mobile station to be handed over.

 移動局200-1,200-2は、例えば、フィーチャーフォン、スマートフォン、タブレット端末、パーソナルコンピュータ、ゲーム装置などの無線通信装置である。移動局200-1,200-2は、各基地局100-1,100-2のサービスエリア内で各基地局100-1,100-2から通話サービスやウェブページの閲覧サービスなど種々のサービスの提供を受ける。 The mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are wireless communication devices such as feature phones, smartphones, tablet terminals, personal computers, and game devices, for example. The mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform various services such as a call service and a web page browsing service from the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 within the service areas of the base stations 100-1 and 100-2. Get offered.

 なお、基地局100-1,100-2と移動局200-1,200-2は双方向の無線通信が可能である。すなわち、基地局100-1,100-2から移動局200-1,200-2への方向(以下、「下り方向」と称する場合がある)と、移動局200-1,200-2から基地局100-1,100-2への方向(以下、「上り方向」と称する場合がある)である。 Note that the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can perform two-way wireless communication. That is, the direction from the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “downward direction”) and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to the base station This is a direction toward the stations 100-1 and 100-2 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “upward direction”).

 各基地局100-1,100-2は、各移動局200-1,200-2と無線通信を行う際に、無線リソース(時間リソースや周波数リソースなど)を割り当て、変調方式や符号化率などを決定する。各基地局100-1,100-2は無線リソースの割り当てや変調方式などのスケジューリング情報を含む制御信号を移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する。各基地局100-1,100-2と各移動局200-1,200-2は制御信号に含まれるスケジューリング情報に従って無線通信を行う。 When the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 perform wireless communication with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2, the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 allocate radio resources (time resources, frequency resources, etc.), and modulation methods, coding rates, etc. To decide. Each of the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 transmits a control signal including scheduling information such as radio resource allocation and modulation scheme to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. The base stations 100-1 and 100-2 and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform wireless communication according to the scheduling information included in the control signal.

 図2に示す移動通信システム10においては、2つの基地局100-1,100-2と2つの移動局200-1,200-2が示されているが、基地局と移動局の個数は1つ又は3つ以上であってもよい。また、図2に示す移動通信システム10においては、基地局100-1に2つの移動局200-1,200-2が接続される例を示しているが、基地局100-1に接続する移動局の個数も1又は3つ以上であってもよい。 In the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG. 2, two base stations 100-1 and 100-2 and two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are shown, but the number of base stations and mobile stations is one. It may be one or more than two. In the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG. 2, an example is shown in which two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are connected to the base station 100-1, but the mobile station 200-1 is connected to the base station 100-1. The number of stations may be 1 or 3 or more.

 さらに、図2に示す移動通信システム10においては、基地局100-1に対して保守システム300が接続される例を示しているが、基地局100-2に保守システム300が接続されてもよい。 Further, in the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG. 2, an example is shown in which the maintenance system 300 is connected to the base station 100-1, but the maintenance system 300 may be connected to the base station 100-2. .

 保守システム300は、例えば、ネットワーク要素の保守や管理を行うシステムである。保守システム300は、トラフィック状況や無線品質情報などを基地局100-1から収集する。 The maintenance system 300 is a system that performs maintenance and management of network elements, for example. The maintenance system 300 collects traffic conditions and radio quality information from the base station 100-1.

 また、保守システム300は、位置情報サーバ500から移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を取得する。そして、保守システム300では、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいて基地局100-1におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更することを決定し、第2の構成への変更を基地局100-1へ指示する。また、保守システム300は、アンテナ構成の変更によりハンドオーバ対象となる移動局200-1,200-2を決定し、当該ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200-1,200-2を基地局100-1へ指示する。保守システム300の構成例などは後述する。 In addition, the maintenance system 300 acquires the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the location information server 500. Then, maintenance system 300 determines to change the antenna configuration in base station 100-1 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the location information, and changes the configuration to the second configuration. Instructs the base station 100-1. Maintenance system 300 determines mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over by changing the antenna configuration, and instructs mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over to base station 100-1. To do. A configuration example of the maintenance system 300 will be described later.

 アクセスゲートウェイ400は、例えば、ネットワークへのアクセスを管理するゲートウェイである。アクセスゲートウェイ400は、例えば、LTEシステムにおいてはMME(Mobility Management Entity:移動管理エンティティ)やSGW(Serving Gateway:サービングゲートウェイ)、PGW(Packet Data Network Gateway:PDNゲートウェイ)などであってもよい。 The access gateway 400 is, for example, a gateway that manages access to the network. In the LTE system, the access gateway 400 may be, for example, an MME (Mobility Management Entity), SGW (Serving Gateway), PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway: PDN gateway), or the like.

 アクセスゲートウェイ400もアンテナの構成を変更することを決定し、基地局100-1へ指示することも可能である。この場合、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、基地局100-1からトラフィック状況やセル構成リストを取得し、また、位置情報サーバ500から移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を取得する。そして、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、トラフィック状況に含まれるトラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいて基地局100-1におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更することを決定する。この場合、基地局100-1はトラフィックの状態変化をトラフィック状況としてアクセスゲートウェイ400へ通知し、アクセスゲートウェイ400は状態変化に基づいてアンテナ構成の変更を決定してもよい。また、アクセスゲートウェイ400はアンテナ構成を変更する際に、基地局100において最新のアンテナ構成を把握するためにアンテナ構成リストを利用し、アンテナ構成リストに基づいてアンテナ構成を変更することを決定してもよい。この場合、基地局100はアンテナ構成を変更後、変更後のアンテナ構成を示すアンテナ構成リストをアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。アクセスゲートウェイ400は、アンテナ構成の変更に伴うハンドオーバ対象の移動局200-1,200-2を基地局100-1へ指示する。なお、以下ではトラフィック状況とトラフィック情報とを区別しないで用いる場合がある。 The access gateway 400 can also decide to change the antenna configuration and instruct the base station 100-1. In this case, the access gateway 400 acquires the traffic status and the cell configuration list from the base station 100-1, and acquires the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the location information server 500. Then, the access gateway 400 determines to change the antenna configuration in the base station 100-1 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information included in the traffic situation. In this case, the base station 100-1 may notify the access gateway 400 of the traffic state change as the traffic state, and the access gateway 400 may determine the antenna configuration change based on the state change. Further, when changing the antenna configuration, the access gateway 400 uses the antenna configuration list to grasp the latest antenna configuration in the base station 100, and determines to change the antenna configuration based on the antenna configuration list. Also good. In this case, after changing the antenna configuration, base station 100 transmits an antenna configuration list indicating the changed antenna configuration to access gateway 400. The access gateway 400 instructs the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to be handed over accompanying the change of the antenna configuration to the base station 100-1. In the following description, the traffic status and the traffic information may be used without being distinguished.

 位置情報サーバ500は、移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を保持する。例えば、移動局200-1,200-2では適宜自局の位置情報をGPS(Global Positioning System)などにより取得している。例えば、位置情報サーバ500は移動局200-1,200-2において取得した位置情報を基地局100-1及びアクセスゲートウェイ400を介して移動局200-1,200-2から取得することが可能である。位置情報サーバ500は、保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400からの要求に応じて移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。なお、位置情報サーバ500にはハードディスクなどの記憶装置(又はメモリ)を備えており、このような記憶装置に移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を記憶している。 The location information server 500 holds location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. For example, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 appropriately acquire the position information of the own station by GPS (Global Positioning System). For example, the location information server 500 can acquire the location information acquired in the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 via the base station 100-1 and the access gateway 400. is there. The location information server 500 transmits the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400 in response to requests from the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400. The location information server 500 includes a storage device (or memory) such as a hard disk, and the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 is stored in such a storage device.

 なお、位置情報サーバ500は、例えば、以下3つの方法のいずれかにより位置情報を収集してもよい。
(1)移動局200-1,200-2から通知されるGPSによる位置情報(A-GNSS(Assisted-Global Navigation Satellite System))
(2)複数の基地局100-1,100-2から受信されたパイロット信号のタイミング(OTDOA(Observed Time Difference of Arrival))
(3)各移動局200-1,200-2によって計測されたE-CID(Enhanced-Cell ID)
Note that the location information server 500 may collect location information by any of the following three methods, for example.
(1) GPS location information notified from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (A-GNSS (Assisted-Global Navigation Satellite System))
(2) Timing of pilot signals received from a plurality of base stations 100-1 and 100-2 (OTDOA (Observed Time Difference of Arrival))
(3) E-CID (Enhanced-Cell ID) measured by each of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2

 上記3つによる計測が全て無効の場合、保守システム300又は基地局100-1は、以下のいずれかにより移動局200-1,200-2の位置を推定する。
(4)基地局100-1から各移動局200-1,200-2に対して無線品質情報(RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power)、RSRQ(Reference Signal Received Quality)、又はパスロスなど)の測定を指示する。その後、基地局100-1が移動局200-1,200-1から取得した無線品質情報を用いて3点測位により移動局200-1,200-2の位置を推定する。
(5)基地局100-1から各移動局200-1,200-2に対して位置情報の推定を指示し、各移動局200-1,200-2において無線品質情報を用いた3点測位により各移動局200-1,200-2の位置を推定する。各移動局200-1,200-2はその結果を基地局100-1へ報告する。
When all of the above three measurements are invalid, the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100-1 estimates the positions of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 by either of the following.
(4) The base station 100-1 instructs the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to measure radio quality information (RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality), or path loss). To do. Thereafter, the base station 100-1 estimates the positions of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 by three-point positioning using the radio quality information acquired from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-1.
(5) The base station 100-1 instructs the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 to estimate position information, and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 use the wireless quality information to perform three-point positioning. Thus, the positions of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are estimated. Each mobile station 200-1, 200-2 reports the result to the base station 100-1.

 後述する動作例においては上記(4)または(5)などが用いられてもよい。 (4) or (5) above may be used in an operation example described later.

 なお、本第2の実施の形態においては、基地局100-1も自局のアンテナ構成の変更を決定することができる。この場合、基地局100-1は保守システム300を介して位置情報サーバ500から各移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を取得し、位置情報とトラフィック情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更することを決定する。基地局100-1はアクセスゲートウェイ400を介して位置情報サーバ500から位置情報を取得してもよい。 In the second embodiment, the base station 100-1 can also decide to change its own antenna configuration. In this case, the base station 100-1 acquires the position information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the position information server 500 via the maintenance system 300, and configures the antenna configuration based on the position information and the traffic information. Decide to change from one configuration to the second configuration. The base station 100-1 may acquire position information from the position information server 500 via the access gateway 400.

 また、以下においては、基地局100-1,100-2は同一構成のため、とくに断らない限り基地局100として説明する場合がある。また、移動局200-1,200-2も同一構成のため、とくに断らない限り移動局200として説明する場合がある。 In the following description, since the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 have the same configuration, they may be described as the base station 100 unless otherwise specified. Further, since the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 have the same configuration, they may be described as the mobile station 200 unless otherwise specified.

 <セル分割とセル統合の例>
 次にセル分割とセル統合の例について説明する。図3(A)はセル分割の例、図3(B)はセル統合の例を表す図である。
<Example of cell division and cell integration>
Next, an example of cell division and cell integration will be described. 3A shows an example of cell division, and FIG. 3B shows an example of cell integration.

 図3(A)に示す例では、基地局100配下には1つのセルがあり、セル分割によって2つのセルへと分割される例が示されている。 In the example shown in FIG. 3A, there is shown an example in which there is one cell under the base station 100 and the cell is divided into two cells by cell division.

 分割前のセルのセルID(Identity)は「Cell#1」、分割後、2つのセルのセルIDは「Cell#1」と「Cell#2」となっている。この場合、移動局200-2が在圏するセルのセルIDは分割前後で「Cell#1」で同一となっており変わらない。他方、移動局200-1が在圏するセルのセルIDは、分割前は「Cell#1」、分割後に「Cell#2」へと変更される。この場合、セルIDの変更があった移動局200-1がハンドオーバ対象となり、セルIDの変更がない移動局200-2はハンドオーバ対象とならずハンドオーバしなくてよい。このように移動局200-1自身が移動しなくてもセルIDが変更されるとハンドオーバ対象の移動局となって、例えば、基地局100と移動局200-1はハンドオーバの処理を行う。 The cell ID (Identity) of the cell before the division is “Cell # 1”, and the cell IDs of the two cells after the division are “Cell # 1” and “Cell # 2”. In this case, the cell ID of the cell in which the mobile station 200-2 is located is the same as “Cell # 1” before and after the division and is not changed. On the other hand, the cell ID of the cell in which mobile station 200-1 is located is changed to “Cell # 1” before division and to “Cell # 2” after division. In this case, the mobile station 200-1 having the cell ID changed becomes a handover target, and the mobile station 200-2 without the cell ID change does not become a handover target and does not have to be handed over. As described above, even if the mobile station 200-1 itself does not move, if the cell ID is changed, the mobile station becomes a handover target mobile station. For example, the base station 100 and the mobile station 200-1 perform handover processing.

 セル分割によるセルIDの変更は上述した例は一例であって、例えば、分割後の2つのセルのセルIDはいずれも変更されてもよい。図3(A)の例では、移動局200-1が在圏するセルは「Cell#1」から「Cell#2」、移動局200-2が在圏するセルは「Cell#1」から「Cell#3」へ変更されてもよい。この場合、2つの移動局200-1,200-2はいずれもハンドオーバ対象となる。 The change of the cell ID by cell division is an example as described above. For example, the cell IDs of two cells after division may be changed. In the example of FIG. 3A, the cell where the mobile station 200-1 is located is “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 2”, and the cell where the mobile station 200-2 is located is “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 1”. It may be changed to “Cell # 3”. In this case, both the two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are targeted for handover.

 図3(B)に示す例では、基地局100配下には1つのセルがあり、セル統合によって2つのセルが1つのセルへと統合される例が示されている。 In the example shown in FIG. 3B, there is an example in which there is one cell under the base station 100, and two cells are integrated into one cell by cell integration.

 例えば、統合前に移動局200-1が在圏するセルのセルIDは「Cell#2」、移動局200-2が在圏するセルのセルIDは「Cell#1」であり、セル統合により、ともに「Cell#1」へと変更される。この場合、移動局200-1が在圏するセルのセルIDは変更されるため移動局200-1はハンドオーバ対象となり、移動局200-2が在圏するセルのセルIDは変更されず移動局200-2はハンドオーバ対象にはならない。 For example, the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-1 is located before the integration is “Cell # 2”, and the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-2 is located is “Cell # 1”. Both are changed to “Cell # 1”. In this case, since the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-1 is located is changed, the mobile station 200-1 becomes a target for handover, and the cell ID of the cell where the mobile station 200-2 is located is not changed. 200-2 is not a handover target.

 セル統合によるセルIDの変更は一例であって、図3(B)に示すようにいずれのセルIDもセル統合で変更されてもよく、この場合、いずれの移動局200-1,200-2もハンドオーバ対象となる。 The change of the cell ID by the cell integration is an example, and any cell ID may be changed by the cell integration as shown in FIG. 3B. In this case, any of the mobile stations 200-1, 200-2 Are also subject to handover.

 次に基地局100、移動局200、保守システム300、アクセスゲートウェイ400の各構成例について説明する。 Next, configuration examples of the base station 100, the mobile station 200, the maintenance system 300, and the access gateway 400 will be described.

 <基地局の構成例>
 次に基地局100の構成例について説明する。図4は基地局100の構成例を表す図である。基地局100は、アンテナ101、受信無線部102、受信多元接続処理部103、復調・復号部104、制御信号処理部105、セル分割/統合制御部(又はセル分割及び統合制御部。以下、「セル制御部」と称する場合がある。)106、アンテナ制御部107を備える。また、基地局100は、トラフィック情報管理部108、移動局位置情報管理部109、TCP/IP(Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)送受信部110、送信電力制御部111、符号化・変調部112、送信多元接続処理部113、送信無線部114を備える。
<Configuration example of base station>
Next, a configuration example of the base station 100 will be described. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the base station 100. The base station 100 includes an antenna 101, a reception radio unit 102, a reception multiple access processing unit 103, a demodulation / decoding unit 104, a control signal processing unit 105, a cell division / integration control unit (or a cell division / integration control unit. It may be referred to as a “cell control unit”.) 106 and an antenna control unit 107 are provided. The base station 100 includes a traffic information management unit 108, a mobile station location information management unit 109, a TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) transmission / reception unit 110, a transmission power control unit 111, an encoding / modulation unit 112, a transmission A multiple access processing unit 113 and a transmission wireless unit 114 are provided.

 なお、基地局100にはAAS120が含まれてもよい。この場合、例えば、トランシーバユニット125-1には受信無線部102と送信無線部114が含まれ、アンテナ(又はアンテナエレメント。以下では「アンテナエレメント」と称する場合がある)126-1にはアンテナ101が含まれる。トランシーバユニット125-1とアンテナエレメント126-1が1つのセット125-1,126-1となって、AAS120には複数のセット125-1,126-1,125-2,126-2,…が含まれる。この場合、各トランシーバユニット125-1,125-2,…内の受信無線部102と送信無線部114は受信多元接続処理部103と送信多元接続処理部113に夫々接続される。また、アンテナ制御部107は、各トランシーバユニット125-1,125-2,…内の受信無線部102と送信無線部114を制御する。 Note that the base station 100 may include the AAS 120. In this case, for example, the transceiver unit 125-1 includes the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114, and the antenna (or antenna element, which may be referred to as “antenna element” hereinafter) 126-1 includes the antenna 101. Is included. The transceiver unit 125-1 and the antenna element 126-1 become one set 125-1, 126-1, and the AAS 120 has a plurality of sets 125-1, 126-1, 125-2, 126-2,. included. In this case, the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114 in each of the transceiver units 125-1, 125-2,... Are connected to the reception multiple access processing unit 103 and the transmission multiple access processing unit 113, respectively. Further, the antenna control unit 107 controls the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114 in each of the transceiver units 125-1, 125-2,.

 なお、複数のトランシーバユニット125-1,125-2,…がトランシーバユニットアレイ、複数のアンテナエレメント126-1,126-2,…がアンテナアレイとなり、AAS120にはトランシーバユニットアレイとアンテナアレイが含まれてもよい。 The plurality of transceiver units 125-1, 125-2,... Is a transceiver unit array, the plurality of antenna elements 126-1, 126-2,... Are antenna arrays, and the AAS 120 includes a transceiver unit array and an antenna array. May be.

 基地局100にはBBU(Base Band Unit)121が含まれ、例えば、BBU121とAAS120は光ファイバーケーブルで接続されてもよい。この場合、BBU121には、受信多元接続処理部103、復調・復号部104、制御信号処理部105、セル制御部106、トラフィック情報管理部108、移動局位置情報管理部109が含まれる。さらに、BBU121には、TCP/IP送受信部110、送信電力制御部111、符号化・変調部112、送信多元接続処理部113が含まれる。BBU121とAAS120は数mから数kmなど物理的に離れた位置に設置されてもよい。 The base station 100 includes a BBU (Base Band Unit) 121. For example, the BBU 121 and the AAS 120 may be connected by an optical fiber cable. In this case, the BBU 121 includes a reception multiple access processing unit 103, a demodulation / decoding unit 104, a control signal processing unit 105, a cell control unit 106, a traffic information management unit 108, and a mobile station location information management unit 109. Further, the BBU 121 includes a TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110, a transmission power control unit 111, an encoding / modulation unit 112, and a transmission multiple access processing unit 113. The BBU 121 and the AAS 120 may be installed at physically separated positions such as several meters to several kilometers.

 なお、第1の実施の形態におけるトラフィック情報管理部170と送受信部171は、例えば、トラフィック情報管理部108とTCP/IP送受信部110にそれぞれ対応する。また、第1の実施の形態における制御部172は、例えば、セル制御部106とアンテナ制御部107に対応する。 Note that the traffic information management unit 170 and the transmission / reception unit 171 in the first embodiment correspond to, for example, the traffic information management unit 108 and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110, respectively. In addition, the control unit 172 in the first embodiment corresponds to, for example, the cell control unit 106 and the antenna control unit 107.

 アンテナ101は、移動局200から送信された無線信号を受信し、受信した無線信号を受信無線部102へ出力する。また、アンテナ101は、送信無線部114から出力された無線信号を移動局200へ送信する。 The antenna 101 receives a radio signal transmitted from the mobile station 200 and outputs the received radio signal to the reception radio unit 102. Further, the antenna 101 transmits the radio signal output from the transmission radio unit 114 to the mobile station 200.

 受信無線部102は、アンテナ101から受け取った無線帯域の無線信号に対して、ベースバンド帯域のベースバンド信号に変換(ダウンコンバート)する。受信無線部102は変換後のベースバンド信号を受信多元接続処理部103へ出力する。 The reception radio unit 102 converts the radio signal in the radio band received from the antenna 101 into a baseband signal in the baseband band (down-conversion). Reception radio section 102 outputs the converted baseband signal to reception multiple access processing section 103.

 受信多元接続処理部103は、ベースバンド信号に対して、S/P(Serial to Parallel)変換処理やFFT(Fast Fourier Transform:高速フーリエ変換)処理などを施す。そして、受信多元接続処理部103は、セル制御部106などから受け取った無線リソース等の情報に基づいて多重化された信号を分離する。受信多元接続処理部103は、分離した信号を受信信号として復調・復号部104へ出力する。 The reception multiple access processing unit 103 performs S / P (Serial-to-Parallel) conversion processing, FFT (Fast-Fourier Transform) processing, and the like on the baseband signal. The reception multiple access processing unit 103 then separates the multiplexed signals based on information such as radio resources received from the cell control unit 106 and the like. Reception multiple access processing section 103 outputs the separated signal to demodulation / decoding section 104 as a received signal.

 復調・復号部104は、受信多元接続処理部103から受け取った受信信号に対して、セル制御部106などから受け取った変調方式と符号化率に従って復調処理と誤り訂正復号化処理を夫々施し、移動局200から送信されたデータや制御信号を再生する。復調・復号部104は、データをアプリケーション処理部などへ出力し、制御信号を制御信号処理部105へ出力する。 Demodulation / decoding section 104 performs demodulation processing and error correction decoding processing on the received signal received from reception multiple access processing section 103 according to the modulation scheme and coding rate received from cell control section 106, etc. Data and control signals transmitted from the station 200 are reproduced. The demodulation / decoding unit 104 outputs data to an application processing unit and the like, and outputs a control signal to the control signal processing unit 105.

 制御信号処理部105は、制御信号を復調・復号部104から受け取った制御信号に対して制御信号に含まれる情報などを抽出する。制御信号に含まれる情報の例としては、例えば、ハンドオーバ完了を表す情報などがある。制御信号処理部105は抽出した情報をセル制御部106へ出力する。また、制御信号処理部105は、セル制御部106からの指示に従って制御信号を生成し、生成した制御信号を送信電力制御部111へ出力する。セル制御部106からの指示としては、例えば、ハンドオーバ指示やスケジューリング情報の作成指示などがあり、制御信号処理部105はこのような指示を含む制御信号を生成してもよい。 The control signal processing unit 105 extracts information included in the control signal from the control signal received from the demodulation / decoding unit 104. Examples of information included in the control signal include information indicating handover completion. The control signal processing unit 105 outputs the extracted information to the cell control unit 106. Control signal processing section 105 generates a control signal in accordance with an instruction from cell control section 106 and outputs the generated control signal to transmission power control section 111. Examples of instructions from the cell control unit 106 include a handover instruction and a scheduling information creation instruction, and the control signal processing unit 105 may generate a control signal including such an instruction.

 セル制御部106は、アンテナ再構成によるセルの分割やセルの統合を制御する。例えば、セル制御部106は、TCP/IP送受信部110を介して保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400から受け取ったアンテナ構成の変更指示に従って変更後のアンテナ101の構成をアンテナ制御部107へ通知する。或いは、セル制御部106は、トラフィック情報管理部108から移動局200との間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を受け取り、移動局位置情報管理部109から移動局200の位置情報を受け取り、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいてセルの構成を変更する。セル制御部106は変更後のセル構成をアンテナ制御部107へ通知する。また、セル制御部106は、例えば、アンテナ構成の変更などによりセルの構成が現在どのようになっているのかを示すアンテナ構成リストをTCP/IP送受信部110を介してアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信してもよい。 The cell control unit 106 controls cell division and cell integration by antenna reconfiguration. For example, the cell control unit 106 notifies the antenna control unit 107 of the changed configuration of the antenna 101 according to the antenna configuration change instruction received from the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. Alternatively, the cell control unit 106 receives traffic information regarding traffic to and from the mobile station 200 from the traffic information management unit 108, receives location information of the mobile station 200 from the mobile station location information management unit 109, and receives traffic information and location information. Change the cell configuration based on The cell control unit 106 notifies the antenna control unit 107 of the changed cell configuration. In addition, the cell control unit 106 transmits an antenna configuration list indicating the current configuration of the cell due to, for example, a change in the antenna configuration to the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. Also good.

 アンテナ制御部107は、受信無線部102と送信無線部114を制御する。例えば、アンテナ制御部107はセル制御部106からの指示に従ってビームフォーミングを変更するよう受信無線部102と送信無線部114へ指示してもよい。或いは、アンテナ制御部107はセル制御部106からの指示に従って受信無線部102や送信無線部114を介してアンテナ101のチルト角を変更するよう指示してもよい。或いは、アンテナ制御部107は、アンテナ101に対してチルト角を変更するように直接制御してもよい。 The antenna control unit 107 controls the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114. For example, the antenna control unit 107 may instruct the reception radio unit 102 and the transmission radio unit 114 to change the beamforming according to an instruction from the cell control unit 106. Alternatively, the antenna control unit 107 may instruct to change the tilt angle of the antenna 101 via the reception radio unit 102 or the transmission radio unit 114 in accordance with an instruction from the cell control unit 106. Alternatively, the antenna control unit 107 may directly control the antenna 101 so as to change the tilt angle.

 トラフィック情報管理部108は、基地局100と移動局200の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を管理する。例えば、トラフィック情報管理部108は、復調部・復号部104から出力されるデータや符号化・変調部112に入力されるデータを監視して、トラフィック情報を取得してもよい。或いは、トラフィック情報管理部108は、セル制御部106でスケジューリングする無線リソースをセル制御部106から取得して当該無線リソースに基づきトラフィック情報を取得してもよい。トラフィック情報管理部108は取得したトラフィック情報をTCP/IP送受信部110を介して定期的に保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400に送信してもよい。また、トラフィック情報管理部108は取得したトラフィック情報をセル制御部106へ出力してもよい。 The traffic information management unit 108 manages traffic information related to traffic between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200. For example, the traffic information management unit 108 may acquire the traffic information by monitoring data output from the demodulation unit / decoding unit 104 or data input to the encoding / modulation unit 112. Alternatively, the traffic information management unit 108 may acquire the radio resource scheduled by the cell control unit 106 from the cell control unit 106 and acquire the traffic information based on the radio resource. The traffic information management unit 108 may periodically transmit the acquired traffic information to the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. The traffic information management unit 108 may output the acquired traffic information to the cell control unit 106.

 移動局位置情報管理部109は、TCP/IP送受信部110を介して取得した移動局200の位置情報を管理する。例えば、移動局位置情報管理部109はセル制御部106の指示に従って、位置情報の取得要求を生成し、TCP/IP送受信部110へ出力する。位置情報の取得要求は保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400を介して位置情報サーバ500へ送信され、位置情報サーバ500は保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400を経由して位置情報を基地局100へ送信する。移動局位置情報管理部109は、例えば、取得した移動局200の位置情報を内部メモリに保持したり、セル制御部106からの指示に従ってセル制御部106へ出力したりする。 The mobile station location information management unit 109 manages the location information of the mobile station 200 acquired via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. For example, the mobile station location information management unit 109 generates a location information acquisition request in accordance with an instruction from the cell control unit 106 and outputs the location information acquisition request to the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. The position information acquisition request is transmitted to the position information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400, and the position information server 500 transmits the position information to the base station 100 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400. The mobile station location information management unit 109 holds, for example, the acquired location information of the mobile station 200 in the internal memory, or outputs it to the cell control unit 106 in accordance with an instruction from the cell control unit 106.

 TCP/IP送受信部110は、保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400と接続され、保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400との間でTCPパケットを交換する。例えば、TCP/IP送受信部110は、保守システム300から送信されたTCPパケットを受信し、TCPパケットからセル構成の変更指示、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200の情報、移動局200の位置情報などを抽出する。TCP/IP送受信部110は、セル構成の変更指示とハンドオーバ対象の移動局200の情報をセル制御部106へ、移動局200の位置情報を移動局位置情報管理部109へ夫々出力する。また、TCP/IP送受信部110は、トラフィック情報管理部108からトラフィック情報、移動局位置情報管理部109から位置情報取得要求などを受け取り、セル制御部106の指示に従ってこれらの情報を含むTCPパケットを生成し、保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。 The TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 is connected to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400, and exchanges TCP packets with the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400. For example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 receives a TCP packet transmitted from the maintenance system 300, and extracts a cell configuration change instruction, information on the handover target mobile station 200, location information of the mobile station 200, and the like from the TCP packet. To do. The TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 outputs a cell configuration change instruction and handover target mobile station 200 information to the cell control unit 106, and mobile station 200 location information to the mobile station location information management unit 109. Also, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 receives traffic information from the traffic information management unit 108, a location information acquisition request from the mobile station location information management unit 109, etc., and receives a TCP packet including these pieces of information according to instructions from the cell control unit 106. It is generated and transmitted to the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400.

 送信電力制御部111は、送信データや制御信号などを受け取り、セル制御部106などから受け取った送信電力制御値に従った送信電力で送信データや制御信号などを符号化・変調部112へ出力する。 The transmission power control unit 111 receives transmission data, a control signal, and the like, and outputs transmission data, a control signal, and the like to the encoding / modulation unit 112 with transmission power according to the transmission power control value received from the cell control unit 106 or the like. .

 符号化・変調部112は、送信電力制御部111から受け取った送信データや制御信号などに対して、セル制御部106などから受け取った符号化率や変調方式に従って、誤り訂正符号化処理や変調処理などを施す。符号化・変調部112は、変調処理後の送信データなどを送信信号として出力する。 The coding / modulation unit 112 performs error correction coding processing and modulation processing on the transmission data and control signal received from the transmission power control unit 111 according to the coding rate and modulation method received from the cell control unit 106 and the like. Etc. The encoding / modulation unit 112 outputs the transmission data after the modulation processing as a transmission signal.

 送信多元接続処理部113は、符号化・変調部112から出力された送信信号に対して、IFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transfer)処理やP/S(Parallel to Serial)変換処理などを施して、多元接続に対応する信号(例えば、OFDMA(Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access)信号)に変換する。送信多元接続処理部113は変換後の送信信号を送信無線部114へ出力する。 The transmission multiple access processing unit 113 performs IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transfer) processing, P / S (Parallel to Serial) conversion processing, and the like on the transmission signal output from the encoding / modulation unit 112 to perform multiple access. (For example, an OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access) signal). Transmission multiple access processing section 113 outputs the converted transmission signal to transmission radio section 114.

 送信無線部114は、送信多元接続処理部113から出力された送信信号に対して、セル制御部106などから受け取った周波数等に基づいて周波数変換処理などを施して無線信号に変換(アップコンバート)する。送信無線部114は無線信号をアンテナ101へ出力する。 The transmission radio unit 114 converts the transmission signal output from the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 into a radio signal by performing frequency conversion processing based on the frequency received from the cell control unit 106 or the like (up-conversion). To do. Transmission radio section 114 outputs a radio signal to antenna 101.

 <移動局の構成例>
 図5は移動局200の構成例を表す図である。移動局200は、アンテナ201、受信無線部202、受信多元接続処理部203、復調・復号部204、制御信号抽出部205、セル分割/統合に対するハンドオーバ制御部(又はセル分割及び統合に対するハンドオーバ制御部。以下、「ハンドオーバ制御部」と称する場合がある。)206を備える。また、移動局200は、同期処理部207、ロールバック制御部208、制御信号処理部209、送信電力制御部210、符号化・変調部211、送信多元接続処理部212、送信無線部213を備える。
<Configuration example of mobile station>
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the mobile station 200. The mobile station 200 includes an antenna 201, a reception radio unit 202, a reception multiple access processing unit 203, a demodulation / decoding unit 204, a control signal extraction unit 205, a handover control unit for cell division / integration (or a handover control unit for cell division and integration). Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a “handover controller”. The mobile station 200 includes a synchronization processing unit 207, a rollback control unit 208, a control signal processing unit 209, a transmission power control unit 210, an encoding / modulation unit 211, a transmission multiple access processing unit 212, and a transmission radio unit 213. .

 アンテナ201は、基地局100から送信された無線信号を受信し、受信した無線信号を受信無線部202へ出力する。また、アンテナ201は、送信無線部213から出力された無線信号を受け取り、受け取った無線信号を基地局100へ送信する。 The antenna 201 receives a radio signal transmitted from the base station 100 and outputs the received radio signal to the reception radio unit 202. Further, the antenna 201 receives the radio signal output from the transmission radio unit 213 and transmits the received radio signal to the base station 100.

 受信無線部202は、無線信号に対して、制御信号抽出部205などから受け取った周波数等に基づいて増幅処理や周波数変換処理を施して無線帯域の無線信号をベースバンド帯域の無線信号へ変換(ダウンコンバート)する。受信無線部202は、ベースバンド信号を受信多元接続処理部203へ出力する。 The reception radio unit 202 performs amplification processing and frequency conversion processing on the radio signal based on the frequency received from the control signal extraction unit 205 or the like to convert the radio signal in the radio band into the radio signal in the baseband ( Down-convert). Reception radio section 202 outputs the baseband signal to reception multiple access processing section 203.

 受信多元接続処理部203は、ベースバンド信号に対して、A/D変換処理やS/P変換処理、FFT処理などを施すことで、多重化されたベースバンド信号を分離する。この場合、受信多元接続処理部203は、制御信号抽出部205から受け取った無線リソースに従って自局に割り当てられたベースバンド信号を分離する。受信多元接続処理部203は分離したベースバンド信号を受信信号として復調・復号部204へ出力する。 The reception multiple access processing unit 203 performs A / D conversion processing, S / P conversion processing, FFT processing, and the like on the baseband signal to separate multiplexed baseband signals. In this case, reception multiple access processing section 203 separates the baseband signal assigned to the own station according to the radio resource received from control signal extraction section 205. Reception multiple access processing section 203 outputs the separated baseband signal to demodulation / decoding section 204 as a received signal.

 復調・復号部204は、受信信号に対して、制御信号抽出部205から受け取った変調方式と符号化率に従って復調処理と誤り訂正復号化処理を夫々施し、基地局100から送信されたデータや制御信号などを再生する。 Demodulation / decoding section 204 performs demodulation processing and error correction decoding processing on the received signal according to the modulation scheme and coding rate received from control signal extraction section 205, respectively, and transmits data and control transmitted from base station 100. Play the signal.

 制御信号抽出部205は、復調・復号部204からの出力に対して制御信号を抽出する。制御信号には、例えば、ハンドオーバ指示を示す情報やスケジューリング情報などが含まれる。制御信号抽出部205は抽出した制御信号をハンドオーバ制御部206へ出力する。 The control signal extraction unit 205 extracts a control signal from the output from the demodulation / decoding unit 204. The control signal includes, for example, information indicating a handover instruction and scheduling information. The control signal extraction unit 205 outputs the extracted control signal to the handover control unit 206.

 ハンドオーバ制御部206は、制御信号に従って、移動局200においてハンドオーバに関する制御を行う。ハンドオーバ制御部206は、ハンドオーバ処理に際し、同期処理を行うことを同期処理部207へ指示する。ハンドオーバ制御部206における処理の詳細は動作例において説明する。 The handover control unit 206 controls the handover in the mobile station 200 according to the control signal. The handover control unit 206 instructs the synchronization processing unit 207 to perform the synchronization process during the handover process. Details of processing in the handover control unit 206 will be described in an operation example.

 同期処理部207は、ハンドオーバ制御部206からの指示に従ってハンドオーバ先のセルと同期処理を行う。同期処理部207はハンドオーバ先のセルに対して同期処理に失敗したとき、ロールバック制御部208に対してロードバック制御を行うように指示する。また、同期処理部207は、ハンドオーバ先のセルに対して同期処理に成功したとき、制御信号処理部209に対してハンドオーバ完了通知の生成などを指示する。同期処理部207は同期処理に際して、同期確立処理要求の生成などを制御信号処理部209へ指示してもよい。 The synchronization processing unit 207 performs synchronization processing with the handover destination cell in accordance with an instruction from the handover control unit 206. When the synchronization processing fails for the handover destination cell, the synchronization processing unit 207 instructs the rollback control unit 208 to perform loadback control. The synchronization processing unit 207 instructs the control signal processing unit 209 to generate a handover completion notification when the synchronization process is successfully performed on the handover destination cell. The synchronization processing unit 207 may instruct the control signal processing unit 209 to generate a synchronization establishment processing request or the like during the synchronization processing.

 ロールバック制御部208は、同期処理部207からの指示に従って、移動局200がハンドオーバ元のセルへロールバックするよう移動局200内の各部を制御する。ロールバックとは、例えば、ハンドオーバ前の状態に戻ることであり、セル分割が失敗した場合でも分割前のセルへの接続を戻すことである。ロールバックによって、移動局200は分割前のセルへ再接続処理を行うこともなく、分割前の元セルへの接続が可能となる。 The rollback control unit 208 controls each unit in the mobile station 200 according to the instruction from the synchronization processing unit 207 so that the mobile station 200 rolls back to the handover source cell. The rollback is, for example, to return to the state before the handover, and to return the connection to the cell before the division even when the cell division fails. By rolling back, the mobile station 200 can connect to the original cell before division without performing reconnection processing to the cell before division.

 制御信号処理部209は、同期処理部207からの指示に従って制御信号を生成し、生成した制御信号を送信電力制御部210へ出力する。制御信号としては、例えば、ハンドオーバ完了を示す情報や同期確立処理要求などが含まれてもよい。 The control signal processing unit 209 generates a control signal according to an instruction from the synchronization processing unit 207, and outputs the generated control signal to the transmission power control unit 210. The control signal may include, for example, information indicating completion of handover or a synchronization establishment processing request.

 送信電力制御部210は、送信データや制御信号などを受け取り、制御信号抽出部205やハンドオーバ制御部206などから受け取った送信電力制御値に従った送信電力で送信データや制御信号などを符号化・変調部211へ出力する。 The transmission power control unit 210 receives transmission data, control signals, etc., and encodes transmission data, control signals, etc. with transmission power according to the transmission power control values received from the control signal extraction unit 205, the handover control unit 206, etc. The data is output to the modulation unit 211.

 符号化・変調部211は、送信電力制御部210から出力された送信データなどに対して、制御信号抽出部205などから受け取った符号化率や変調方式に従って、誤り訂正符号化処理や変調処理などを夫々施す。符号化・変調部211は、変調後の送信データなどを送信信号として出力する。 The coding / modulation unit 211 performs error correction coding processing, modulation processing, etc. on the transmission data output from the transmission power control unit 210 according to the coding rate and modulation method received from the control signal extraction unit 205, etc. Are applied respectively. The encoding / modulation unit 211 outputs modulated transmission data and the like as a transmission signal.

 送信多元接続処理部212は、符号化・変調部211から出力された送信信号に対して、IFFT処理やP/S変換処理などを施して、多元接続に対応する信号(例えば、OFDMA信号)に変換する。送信多元接続処理部212は、変換後の送信信号を送信無線部213へ出力する。 The transmission multiple access processing unit 212 performs IFFT processing, P / S conversion processing, and the like on the transmission signal output from the encoding / modulation unit 211 to a signal corresponding to multiple access (for example, an OFDMA signal). Convert. The transmission multiple access processing unit 212 outputs the converted transmission signal to the transmission radio unit 213.

 送信無線部213は、送信多元接続処理部212から受け取った送信信号に対して、制御信号抽出部205から受け取った周波数等に基づいて周波数変換処理や増幅処理などを施して無線信号に変換(アップコンバート)する。送信無線部213は無線信号をアンテナ201へ出力する。 The transmission radio unit 213 converts the transmission signal received from the transmission multiple access processing unit 212 into a radio signal by performing frequency conversion processing or amplification processing based on the frequency received from the control signal extraction unit 205 or the like. Convert). Transmission radio section 213 outputs a radio signal to antenna 201.

 <保守システムの構成例>
 図6は保守システム300の構成例を表す図である。保守システム300は、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301、信号解析部302、トラフィック情報管理部303、位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部304、信号解析部305、移動局位置情報管理部306を備える。また、保守システム300は、セル分割/統合(アンテナ構成)判定部/移動局判定部(セル分割及び統合(アンテナ構成)判定部及び移動局判定部。以下、「判定部」と称する場合がある。)307を備える。
<Example of maintenance system configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the maintenance system 300. The maintenance system 300 includes a TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for a base station, a signal analysis unit 302, a traffic information management unit 303, a TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for a location information server, a signal analysis unit 305, and a mobile station location information management unit 306. Prepare. The maintenance system 300 includes a cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit (cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit and mobile station determination unit. Hereinafter, these may be referred to as a “determination unit”). .) 307 is provided.

 なお、第1の実施の形態における送受信部610は、例えば、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301と位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部304に対応する。また、第1の実施の形態における判定部620は、例えば、判定部307に対応する。 Note that the transmission / reception unit 610 in the first embodiment corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for base station and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for location information server. Also, the determination unit 620 in the first embodiment corresponds to the determination unit 307, for example.

 基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301は、基地局100との間でTCPパケットを交換する。すなわち、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301は、基地局100から送信されたTCPパケットを受信し、受信したTCPパケットから、トラフィック情報や無線品質情報などを抽出し、抽出したトラフィック情報などを信号解析部302へ出力する。また、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301は、判定部307から出力されたセル構成の変更指示などを受け取り、これらの情報を含むTCPパケットを生成し、生成したTCPパケットを基地局100へ送信する。 The base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 exchanges TCP packets with the base station 100. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station receives the TCP packet transmitted from the base station 100, extracts traffic information and radio quality information from the received TCP packet, and signals the extracted traffic information and the like. The data is output to the analysis unit 302. Further, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station receives the cell configuration change instruction output from the determination unit 307, generates a TCP packet including the information, and transmits the generated TCP packet to the base station 100. To do.

 信号解析部302は、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301から出力されたトラフィック情報などを受け取り、受け取ったこれらの情報をトラフィック情報管理部303へ出力する。 The signal analysis unit 302 receives the traffic information output from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station, and outputs the received information to the traffic information management unit 303.

 トラフィック情報管理部303は、基地局100から送信されたトラフィック情報を管理する。トラフィック情報管理部303は、信号解析部302から受け取ったトラフィック情報を内部メモリに適宜保持したり、判定部307へ出力したりしてもよい。 The traffic information management unit 303 manages traffic information transmitted from the base station 100. The traffic information management unit 303 may appropriately store the traffic information received from the signal analysis unit 302 in the internal memory or output the traffic information to the determination unit 307.

 位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部304は位置情報サーバ500との間でTCPパケットを交換する。すなわち、位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部304は、位置情報サーバ500から送信されたTCPパケットを受信し、受信したTCPパケットから移動局200の位置情報などを抽出し、抽出した位置情報などを信号解析部305へ出力する。 The location information server TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 exchanges TCP packets with the location information server 500. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for the location information server receives the TCP packet transmitted from the location information server 500, extracts the location information of the mobile station 200 from the received TCP packet, and extracts the extracted location information and the like. Output to the signal analysis unit 305.

 信号解析部305は、位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部304から位置情報を受け取り、受け取った位置情報を移動局位置情報管理部306へ出力する。 The signal analysis unit 305 receives the location information from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for the location information server, and outputs the received location information to the mobile station location information management unit 306.

 移動局位置情報管理部306は、位置情報サーバ500から送信された移動局200の位置情報を管理する。移動局位置情報管理部306は、信号解析部305から受け取った位置情報を内部メモリに適宜保持したり、判定部307へ送信したりしてもよい。 The mobile station location information management unit 306 manages the location information of the mobile station 200 transmitted from the location information server 500. The mobile station location information management unit 306 may appropriately store the location information received from the signal analysis unit 305 in an internal memory or transmit the location information to the determination unit 307.

 判定部307は、トラフィック情報管理部303から受け取ったトラフィック情報と移動局位置情報管理部306から受け取った位置情報に基づいて基地局100におけるセルの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更することを決定する。判定部307は第2の構成への変更指示及び該変更により新規セルへの移動を要する移動局のリストを基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301へ出力する。 The determination unit 307 changes the cell configuration in the base station 100 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information received from the traffic information management unit 303 and the location information received from the mobile station location information management unit 306. Decide what to do. The determination unit 307 outputs a change instruction to the second configuration and a list of mobile stations that need to move to a new cell due to the change to the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station.

 <アクセスゲートウェイの構成例>
 図7はアクセスゲートウェイ400の構成例を表す図である。アクセスゲートウェイ400は、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401、信号解析部402、トラフィック情報管理部403、位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404、信号解析部405、移動局位置情報管理部406を備える。また、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、セル分割/統合(アンテナ構成)判定部/移動局判定部(又は、セル分割及び統合(アンテナ構成)判定部及び移動局判定部。以下、「判定部」と称する場合がある。)407を備える。
<Configuration example of access gateway>
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the access gateway 400. The access gateway 400 includes a base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401, a signal analysis unit 402, a traffic information management unit 403, a location information server TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404, a signal analysis unit 405, and a mobile station location information management unit 406. Prepare. In addition, the access gateway 400 includes a cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit (or a cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit and a mobile station determination unit; hereinafter referred to as a “determination unit”). 407 is provided.

 なお、第1の実施の形態における送受信部610は、例えば、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401と位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404に対応する。また、第1の実施の形態における判定部620は、例えば、判定部407に対応する。 Note that the transmission / reception unit 610 in the first embodiment corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for base stations and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for location information servers. Further, the determination unit 620 in the first embodiment corresponds to the determination unit 407, for example.

 基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401は、基地局100との間でTCPパケットを交換する。すなわち、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401は、基地局100から送信されたTCPパケットを受信し、受信したTCPパケットから、負荷状態変化通知やアンテナ構成リストなどを抽出し、抽出した負荷状態変化通知などを信号解析部402へ出力する。また、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401は、判定部407から出力されたセル構成の変更指示などを受け取り、これらの情報を含むTCPパケットを生成し、生成したTCPパケットを基地局100へ送信する。 The base station TCP / IP transceiver 401 exchanges TCP packets with the base station 100. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station receives the TCP packet transmitted from the base station 100, extracts a load state change notification, an antenna configuration list, and the like from the received TCP packet, and extracts the load state change Notification or the like is output to the signal analysis unit 402. Also, the base station TCP / IP transceiver 401 receives the cell configuration change instruction output from the determination unit 407, generates a TCP packet including these pieces of information, and transmits the generated TCP packet to the base station 100. To do.

 信号解析部402は、基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401から出力された負荷状態変化通知などを受け取り、受け取った負荷状態変化通知などをトラフィック情報管理部403へ出力する。 The signal analysis unit 402 receives the load state change notification output from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station, and outputs the received load state change notification to the traffic information management unit 403.

 トラフィック情報管理部403は、基地局100から送信された負荷状態変化通知やアンテナ構成リストなどを管理する。トラフィック情報管理部403は、信号解析部402から受け取った負荷状態変化通知やアンテナ構成リストなどを内部メモリに適宜保持したり、判定部307へ出力したりしてもよい。 The traffic information management unit 403 manages the load state change notification and the antenna configuration list transmitted from the base station 100. The traffic information management unit 403 may appropriately store the load state change notification, the antenna configuration list, and the like received from the signal analysis unit 402 in the internal memory or may output them to the determination unit 307.

 位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404は位置情報サーバ500との間でTCPパケットを交換する。すなわち、位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404は、位置情報サーバ500から送信されたTCPパケットを受信し、受信したTCPパケットから移動局200の位置情報などを抽出し、抽出した位置情報などを信号解析部405へ出力する。 The location information server TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 exchanges TCP packets with the location information server 500. That is, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for the location information server receives the TCP packet transmitted from the location information server 500, extracts the location information of the mobile station 200 from the received TCP packet, and extracts the extracted location information, etc. Output to the signal analysis unit 405.

 信号解析部405は、位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404から出力された位置情報を受け取り、受け取った位置情報を移動局位置情報管理部406へ出力する。 The signal analysis unit 405 receives the location information output from the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for the location information server, and outputs the received location information to the mobile station location information management unit 406.

 移動局位置情報管理部406は、位置情報サーバ500から送信された移動局200の位置情報を管理する。移動局位置情報管理部406は、信号解析部405から受け取った位置情報を内部メモリに適宜保持したり、判定部407へ出力したりしてもよい。 The mobile station location information management unit 406 manages the location information of the mobile station 200 transmitted from the location information server 500. The mobile station location information management unit 406 may appropriately store the location information received from the signal analysis unit 405 in an internal memory or output the location information to the determination unit 407.

 判定部407は、トラフィック情報管理部403から受け取った負荷状態変化通知と移動局位置情報管理部406から受け取った位置情報に基づいて基地局100におけるセルの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更することを決定する。判定部407は第2の構成への変更指示及び該変更による新規セルへの移動を要する移動局のリストを基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401へ出力する。 The determination unit 407 changes the cell configuration in the base station 100 from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the load state change notification received from the traffic information management unit 403 and the location information received from the mobile station location information management unit 406. Decide to change to The determination unit 407 outputs a change instruction to the second configuration and a list of mobile stations that need to move to a new cell due to the change to the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station.

 <動作例>
 次に第2の実施の形態における動作例について説明する。動作例については以下の順番で説明する。
<1.セル分割又は統合処理実行の決定>
 <1.1 セル分割処理フロー>
  <1.1.1 基地局主導によるセル分割処理フロー>
  <1.1.2 保守システム主導によるセル分割処理フロー>
  <1.1.3 アクセスゲートウェイ主導によるセル分割処理フロー>
 <1.2.セル統合処理フロー>
  <1.2.1 基地局主導によるセル統合処理フロー>
  <1.2.2 保守システム主導によるセル統合処理フロー>
  <1.2.3 アクセスゲートウェイ主導によるセル統合処理フロー>
<2.セル分割時の処理>
 <2.1 基地局主導(非競合モード)の同期処理>
  <2.1.1 セル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンス(非競合モード)>
  <2.1.2 セル分割によるハンドオーバ失敗時のロールバック(非競合モード)>
 <2.2 移動局主導(競合モード)の同期処理>
  <2.2.1 セル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンス(競合モード)>
  <2.2.2 セル分割によるハンドオーバ失敗時のロールバック(競合モード)>
 <2.3 隣接基地局から分割処理中新規セルへのハンドオーバ>
<3.セル統合時の処理>
 <3.1 基地局主導(非競合モード)の同期処理>
  <3.1.1 セル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンス(非競合モード)>
 <3.2 移動局主導(競合モード)の同期処理>
  <3.2.1 セル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンス(競合モード)>
 <3.3 隣接基地局からの統合処理中セルへのハンドオーバ>
<4.LTEに適用した場合の動作例>
 <4.1.eNBによるセル分割及び統合判断>
 <4.2 EMS又はNMSによるセル分割及び統合判断>
 <4.3 MMEによるセル分割及び統合判断>
 <4.4 セル分割処理シーケンス>
 <4.5 セル統合処理シーケンス>
 <4.6 隣接eNBからのハンドオーバ>
 <4.7 セル分割及び統合処理失敗によるハンドオーバ未完了>
<Operation example>
Next, an operation example in the second embodiment will be described. Operation examples will be described in the following order.
<1. Determination of cell division or integration processing execution>
<1.1 Cell division processing flow>
<1.1.1 Cell division processing flow led by base station>
<1.1.2 Maintenance system led cell division processing flow>
<1.1.3 Cell division processing flow led by access gateway>
<1.2. Cell integration processing flow>
<1.2.1 Cell integration processing flow led by base station>
<1.2.2 Maintenance system led cell integration processing flow>
<1.2.3 Cell integration processing flow led by access gateway>
<2. Processing when dividing cells>
<2.1 Base station-initiated (non-contention mode) synchronization processing>
<2.1.1 Handover sequence by cell division (non-contention mode)>
<2.1.2 Rollback when handover fails due to cell division (non-contention mode)>
<2.2 Synchronization process initiated by the mobile station (contention mode)>
<2.2.1 Handover sequence by cell division (contention mode)>
<2.2.2 Rollback when handover fails due to cell division (contention mode)>
<2.3 Handover from neighboring base station to new cell during segmentation>
<3. Processing during cell integration>
<3.1 Synchronization process initiated by base station (non-competing mode)>
<3.1.1 Handover sequence by cell integration (non-contention mode)>
<3.2 Synchronization processing initiated by the mobile station (contention mode)>
<3.2.1 Handover sequence by cell integration (contention mode)>
<3.3 Handover from neighboring base station to integrated processing cell>
<4. Example of operation when applied to LTE>
<4.1. Cell division and integration judgment by eNB>
<4.2 Cell division and integration judgment by EMS or NMS>
<4.3 Cell division and integration judgment by MME>
<4.4 Cell Division Processing Sequence>
<4.5 Cell integration processing sequence>
<4.6 Handover from neighboring eNB>
<4.7 Incomplete handover due to cell division and integration failure>

 <1.セル分割又は統合処理実行の決定>
 上述したように、保守システム300や基地局100は、基地局100におけるトラフィック情報を収集する機能を有する。保守システム300や基地局100は、収集したトラフィック情報に基づいて、基地局100と移動局200との間のトラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したか否か、或いは輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移したか否かを判別する。この場合、保守システム300や基地局100は、トラフィック情報によって示される値が輻輳状態閾値を超えると通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したことを検出する。また、保守システム300や基地局100は、トラフィック情報によって示される値が通常状態閾値(又は緩和状態閾値)より低くなると輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移したことを検出する。2つの閾値の関係は、例えば、輻輳状態閾値>通常状態閾値でもよい。この関係により、通常状態から輻輳状態、さらに輻輳状態から通常状態へなど、状態変化が頻繁に発生することを防止することが可能となる。
<1. Determination of cell division or integration processing execution>
As described above, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 have a function of collecting traffic information in the base station 100. Based on the collected traffic information, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 determine whether or not the traffic state between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 has transitioned from the normal state to the congestion state, or from the congestion state to the normal state. It is determined whether or not a state transition has been made. In this case, when the value indicated by the traffic information exceeds the congestion state threshold, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect that the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state. In addition, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect that the state transition has been made from the congestion state to the normal state when the value indicated by the traffic information becomes lower than the normal state threshold (or the mitigation state threshold). The relationship between the two thresholds may be, for example, congestion state threshold> normal state threshold. With this relationship, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of state changes such as from the normal state to the congestion state and from the congestion state to the normal state.

 そして、保守システム300や基地局100は、通常状態から輻輳状態への状態遷移を検出したとき、基地局100配下のセルを分割することを決定する。その際、保守システム300や基地局100は、位置情報サーバ500から取得した位置情報に基づいて、移動局200の位置の偏りを検出し、このような偏りに対して最適なセル分割となるアンテナ構成を決定する。基地局100配下のセルが分割されることで、基地局100配下のセル数が増加する。基地局100配下のセル数が増加することで、基地局100配下で制御可能な(又は収容可能な)移動局200の個数も増大し、基地局100のセル容量は拡大する。セル容量の拡大によって基地局100は輻輳状態に対応することが可能となる。その際に、保守システム300や基地局100は最適なセル分割となるアンテナ構成を決定することで、セル容量も適切に拡大させることが可能となる。 Then, when the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 detects a state transition from the normal state to the congestion state, the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 determines to divide the cells under the base station 100. At that time, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect the positional deviation of the mobile station 200 based on the positional information acquired from the positional information server 500, and an antenna that performs optimal cell division against such deviation. Determine the configuration. As the cells under the base station 100 are divided, the number of cells under the base station 100 increases. As the number of cells under the base station 100 increases, the number of mobile stations 200 that can be controlled (or accommodated) under the base station 100 also increases, and the cell capacity of the base station 100 increases. By expanding the cell capacity, the base station 100 can cope with the congestion state. At that time, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 can appropriately increase the cell capacity by determining the antenna configuration that provides the optimum cell division.

 一方、保守システム300や基地局100は、輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出したとき、基地局100配下のセルを統合することを決定する。その際、保守システム300や基地局100は、位置情報サーバ500から取得した位置情報に基づいて、移動局200の位置の偏りを検出し、このような偏りに最適なセル統合となるアンテナ構成を決定してもよい。トラフィック状況が通常状態に戻った場合、基地局100ではセル容量を減少させて、分割されたセルの構成を元に戻すようにしている。これにより、例えば、基地局100に収容されるセル数が減少するため、ハンドオーバの頻度も減少させ、セル間に生じる干渉も減少させることが可能となる。その際に、保守システム300や基地局100は最適なセル分割となるアンテナ構成を決定することで、セル容量も適切に拡大させることが可能となる。 On the other hand, when the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state, the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 determines to integrate cells under the base station 100. At that time, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 detect the positional deviation of the mobile station 200 based on the positional information acquired from the positional information server 500, and have an antenna configuration that provides optimum cell integration for such deviation. You may decide. When the traffic state returns to the normal state, the base station 100 reduces the cell capacity and restores the configuration of the divided cells. Thereby, for example, since the number of cells accommodated in the base station 100 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the frequency of handover and to reduce the interference generated between the cells. At that time, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 can appropriately increase the cell capacity by determining the antenna configuration that provides the optimum cell division.

 従って、保守システム300や基地局100は、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいてセルの構成を変更することで、例えば、セル容量を適切に制御可能となる。 Therefore, the maintenance system 300 and the base station 100 can appropriately control the cell capacity, for example, by changing the cell configuration based on the traffic information and the location information.

 セルの分割や統合の決定は、更に、アクセスゲートウェイ400において行われてもよい。アクセスゲートウェイ400もトラフィック情報を収集し、輻輳状態閾値や通常状態閾値を用いて状態遷移を検出する。 The determination of cell division or integration may be further performed in the access gateway 400. The access gateway 400 also collects traffic information and detects a state transition using a congestion state threshold or a normal state threshold.

 このようにセルの分割や統合の決定に関する処理が保守システム300やアクセスゲートウェイ400で行われることで、例えば、複数の基地局100において当該処理が行われる場合と比較して、運用性や保守性の面で効率的な管理が可能となる。 As described above, processing related to cell division and integration determination is performed in the maintenance system 300 and the access gateway 400, so that, for example, operability and maintainability are compared with the case where the processing is performed in a plurality of base stations 100. Efficient management is possible.

 以下においては、このようなセルの分割と統合の処理について説明する。セル分割処理とセル統合処理の各々について、基地局100で行われる場合、保守システム300で行われる場合、及びアクセスゲートウェイ400で行われる場合の各々について以下説明することにする。 In the following, such cell division and integration processing will be described. Each of the cell division process and the cell integration process performed by the base station 100, the maintenance system 300, and the access gateway 400 will be described below.

 <1.1 セル分割処理フロー>
  <1.1.1 基地局主導によるセル分割処理フロー>
 最初に、基地局100において基地局100配下のセルの分割を決定する場合のセル分割処理について説明する。図8は基地局主導でセル分割処理が行われる場合の動作例を表すフローチャートである。
<1.1 Cell division processing flow>
<1.1.1 Cell division processing flow led by base station>
First, cell division processing in the case where the base station 100 determines division of cells under the base station 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell division processing is performed by the base station.

 基地局100は処理を開始すると(S10)、基地局100と移動局200間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を収集する(S11)。例えば、トラフィック情報管理部108が復調・復号部104から出力されるデータ量などに基づいてトラフィック情報を収集してもよい。或いは、移動局200で取得したトラフィック情報を移動局200から取得し、トラフィック情報管理部108が復調・復号部104から出力された当該トラフィック情報を取得するようにしてもよい。 When the base station 100 starts processing (S10), it collects traffic information regarding traffic between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 (S11). For example, the traffic information management unit 108 may collect traffic information based on the amount of data output from the demodulation / decoding unit 104. Alternatively, the traffic information acquired by the mobile station 200 may be acquired from the mobile station 200, and the traffic information management unit 108 may acquire the traffic information output from the demodulation / decoding unit 104.

 次に、基地局100は、収集したトラフィック情報に基づいて、基地局100と移動局200間のトラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したか否かを判別する(S12)。例えば、セル制御部106はトラフィック情報管理部108から取得したトラフィック情報によって示される値が輻輳状態閾値(又は第1の閾値)を超えたときに通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したことを検出し、当該値が輻輳状態閾値以下のとき通常状態が維持されることを検出してもよい。状態遷移の対象となるものは、例えば、基地局100配下のセル内における負荷でもよいし、基地局100自体の負荷でもよく、基地局100におけるこのような負荷が輻輳状態閾値を超えて上昇したことが検出できればよい。以降においても同様である。 Next, the base station 100 determines whether or not the traffic state between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 has changed from the normal state to the congestion state based on the collected traffic information (S12). For example, the cell control unit 106 detects that the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state occurs when the value indicated by the traffic information acquired from the traffic information management unit 108 exceeds the congestion state threshold (or the first threshold). When the value is equal to or less than the congestion state threshold value, it may be detected that the normal state is maintained. The target of the state transition may be, for example, a load in a cell under the base station 100 or a load of the base station 100 itself, and such a load in the base station 100 has exceeded a congestion state threshold. It is sufficient if it can be detected. The same applies to the following.

 基地局100は、トラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したことを検出したとき(S12でYes)、基地局100配下のセルを分割することを決定する(S13)。例えば、セル制御部106はトラフィック状況が輻輳状態へ状態遷移したことを検出すると、セルの分割を決定する。 When the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has changed from the normal state to the congestion state (Yes in S12), the base station 100 determines to divide the cells under the base station 100 (S13). For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects that the traffic state has changed to a congestion state, the cell control unit 106 determines cell division.

 次に、基地局100は、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400に対して移動局200の位置情報の収集を要求する(S14)。例えば、セル制御部106は移動局位置情報管理部109に対して位置情報の収集を指示し、移動局位置情報管理部109は位置情報の収集指示をTCP/IP送受信部110を介して保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。当該収集指示は保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400を介して位置情報サーバ500へ送信される。 Next, the base station 100 requests the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 to collect location information of the mobile station 200 (S14). For example, the cell control unit 106 instructs the mobile station location information management unit 109 to collect location information, and the mobile station location information management unit 109 sends the location information collection instruction via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. 300 or access gateway 400. The collection instruction is transmitted to the location information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400.

 次に、基地局100は、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400が位置情報サーバ500から位置情報を取得後、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400から位置情報を受信する(S15)。例えば、位置情報サーバ500は当該収集指示により対応する移動局200の位置情報を保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信し、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400は受信した位置情報を基地局100へ送信する。例えば、移動局位置情報管理部109は保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400から送信された位置情報をTCP/IP送受信部110を介して受信し、受信した位置情報をセル制御部106へ出力する。 Next, the base station 100 receives the position information from the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 after the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 acquires the position information from the position information server 500 (S15). For example, the location information server 500 transmits the location information of the corresponding mobile station 200 to the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 according to the collection instruction, and the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 transmits the received location information to the base station 100. . For example, the mobile station location information management unit 109 receives location information transmitted from the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110, and outputs the received location information to the cell control unit 106.

 次に、基地局100は、移動局200の分布状況から最適な分割となるアンテナ構成を決定する(S16)。例えば、セル制御部106は、トラフィック情報に基づいて基地局100の負荷が輻輳状態閾値を超えたことを検出したとき、位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することで基地局100配下のセルを分割することを決定する。例えば、セル制御部106は、トラフィック量が輻輳状態閾値を超えた時点での各移動局200の位置情報から移動局200の偏りを判断して、最適なセル構成となるアンテナ構成を決定する。この場合、セル制御部106は、例えば、分割後の各セルに配置される移動局200の個数が均一になるようにアンテナ構成を決定してもよい。 Next, the base station 100 determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided from the distribution status of the mobile stations 200 (S16). For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects that the load of the base station 100 exceeds the congestion state threshold based on the traffic information, the cell control unit 106 changes the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the position information. By changing, it is determined to divide cells under the base station 100. For example, the cell control unit 106 determines the bias of the mobile station 200 from the position information of each mobile station 200 at the time when the traffic volume exceeds the congestion state threshold, and determines the antenna configuration that is the optimal cell configuration. In this case, the cell control unit 106 may determine the antenna configuration so that, for example, the number of mobile stations 200 arranged in each divided cell is uniform.

 次に、基地局100は、新規セルに配置する移動局200を位置情報に基づいて決定する(S16)。例えば、セル制御部106は分割後の各セルにおいてセルIDが変更となったセルに在圏する移動局200を位置情報に基づいて決定してもよい。 Next, the base station 100 determines the mobile station 200 to be arranged in the new cell based on the location information (S16). For example, the cell control unit 106 may determine the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID has been changed in each divided cell based on the location information.

 次に、基地局100は該移動局200に対する新規セルへのハンドオーバ制御を実行する(S18)。例えば、セル制御部106は、セルの分割をアンテナ制御部107へ指示し、制御信号処理部105に対して分割後の新規セルに配置する移動局200に対してハンドオーバの実行を指示する。以後、基地局100は、制御信号処理部105を介して該移動局200との間で制御信号を交換するなどしてハンドオーバの処理を行う。 Next, the base station 100 executes handover control for the mobile station 200 to a new cell (S18). For example, the cell control unit 106 instructs the antenna control unit 107 to divide the cell, and instructs the control signal processing unit 105 to execute handover to the mobile station 200 arranged in the new divided cell. Thereafter, the base station 100 performs handover processing by exchanging control signals with the mobile station 200 via the control signal processing unit 105.

 そして、基地局100は一連の処理を終了させる(S19)。 Then, the base station 100 ends a series of processes (S19).

 一方、基地局100はトラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移していないことを検出したとき(S12でNo)、セル分割などの処理を行うことなく、一連の処理を終了させる(S19)。 On the other hand, when the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the normal state to the congestion state (No in S12), the base station 100 ends the series of processing without performing processing such as cell division (S19). .

  <1.1.2 保守システム主導によるセル分割処理フロー>
 図9は保守システム300主導でセル分割処理が行われる場合の動作例を表すフローチャートである。
<1.1.2 Maintenance system led cell division processing flow>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell division processing is performed under the initiative of the maintenance system 300.

 保守システム300は処理を開始すると(S30)、基地局100からトラフィック情報を収集する(S31)。例えば、トラフィック情報管理部303が基地局100から送信されたトラフィック情報を受信することで収集する。 When the maintenance system 300 starts processing (S30), it collects traffic information from the base station 100 (S31). For example, the traffic information management unit 303 collects traffic information transmitted from the base station 100 by receiving it.

 次に、保守システム300は基地局100と移動局200との間のトラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したか否かを判別する(S32)。例えば、判定部307はトラフィック情報管理部303から取得したトラフィック情報によって示される値が輻輳状態閾値を超えたときに通常状態から輻輳状態への状態遷移を検出し、当該値が輻輳状態閾値以下のとき通常状態を維持していることを検出してもよい。 Next, the maintenance system 300 determines whether or not the traffic state between the base station 100 and the mobile station 200 has transitioned from the normal state to the congestion state (S32). For example, the determination unit 307 detects a state transition from the normal state to the congestion state when the value indicated by the traffic information acquired from the traffic information management unit 303 exceeds the congestion state threshold, and the value is equal to or less than the congestion state threshold. Sometimes it may be detected that the normal state is maintained.

 保守システム300は、トラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態への状態遷移を検出すると(S32でYes)、基地局100配下のセルを分割することを決定し(S33)、位置情報サーバ500から移動局200の位置情報を取得する(S34)。例えば、判定部305が輻輳状態への状態遷移を検出するとセルの分割を決定し、移動局位置情報管理部306に対して位置情報の取得を指示し、移動局位置情報管理部306は位置情報サーバ500から位置情報を取得する。 When the traffic state detects a state transition from the normal state to the congestion state (Yes in S32), the maintenance system 300 determines to divide the cell under the base station 100 (S33), and from the location information server 500 to the mobile station The position information of 200 is acquired (S34). For example, when the determination unit 305 detects a state transition to a congestion state, it determines cell division, instructs the mobile station location information management unit 306 to acquire location information, and the mobile station location information management unit 306 The position information is acquired from the server 500.

 次に、保守システム300は、移動局200の分布状況から最適な分割となるアンテナ構成を決定する(S35)。例えば、判定部307は、セル制御部106と同様に、トラフィック情報に基づいて基地局100の負荷が輻輳状態閾値を超えたことを検出したとき、位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更して基地局配下のセルを分割することを決定する。この場合、判定部307は位置情報に基づいて移動局200の偏りを分析し、最適な分割となるアンテナ構成を決定する。判定部307は、基地局主導の場合(例えばS16)と同様に、分割後の各セルに配置される移動局200の個数が均一になるようにアンテナ構成を決定してもよい。 Next, the maintenance system 300 determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided from the distribution status of the mobile station 200 (S35). For example, when the determination unit 307 detects that the load of the base station 100 has exceeded the congestion state threshold based on the traffic information, similarly to the cell control unit 106, the determination unit 307 sets the first antenna configuration based on the position information. It is determined to change the configuration to the second configuration and divide the cells under the base station. In this case, the determination unit 307 analyzes the bias of the mobile station 200 based on the position information, and determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided. The determination unit 307 may determine the antenna configuration so that the number of mobile stations 200 arranged in each divided cell is uniform, as in the case of the base station initiative (for example, S16).

 次に、保守システム300は、新規セルに配置しハンドオーバ対象となる移動局200を位置情報から決定する(S36)。例えば、判定部307は分割後の各セルにおいてセルIDが変更となったセルに在圏する移動局200を位置情報に基づいて決定する。 Next, the maintenance system 300 determines the mobile station 200 to be placed in a new cell and to be handed over from the location information (S36). For example, the determination unit 307 determines the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID has been changed in each divided cell based on the position information.

 次に、保守システム300は、決定したアンテナ構成とハンドオーバ対象の移動局200を基地局100へ指示する(S37)。例えば、判定部307は、セル分割に対応する変更後のアンテナ構成を基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301を介して基地局100へ送信する。また、例えば、判定部307は、S36で決定したハンドオーバ対象の移動局200を含むハンドオーバ対象移動局リストを基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301を介して基地局100へ送信する。基地局100では当該リストに含まれる移動局200をハンドオーバ対象の移動局として処理を行う。 Next, the maintenance system 300 instructs the determined antenna configuration and the mobile station 200 to be handed over to the base station 100 (S37). For example, the determination unit 307 transmits the changed antenna configuration corresponding to the cell division to the base station 100 via the base station-oriented TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301. Also, for example, the determination unit 307 transmits the handover target mobile station list including the handover target mobile station 200 determined in S36 to the base station 100 via the base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301. In the base station 100, the mobile station 200 included in the list is processed as a handover target mobile station.

 次に、保守システム300は、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200へのハンドオーバ制御の実行を基地局100へ指示する(S38)。例えば、判定部307が該移動局200に対してハンドオーバを実行するよう基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301を介して基地局100へ指示する。基地局100では当該指示によりハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に対するハンドオーバ制御を実行する。 Next, the maintenance system 300 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover control to the handover target mobile station 200 (S38). For example, the determination unit 307 instructs the base station 100 via the base station TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 to perform handover to the mobile station 200. In response to the instruction, the base station 100 executes handover control for the mobile station 200 to be handed over.

 そして、保守システム300は一連の処理を終了させる(S39)。 Then, the maintenance system 300 ends a series of processes (S39).

 一方、保守システム300はトラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移していないことを検出したとき(S32でNo)、セル分割の決定などを行うことなく一連の処理を終了させる(S39)。 On the other hand, when the maintenance system 300 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the normal state to the congestion state (No in S32), the maintenance system 300 ends the series of processes without determining the cell division (S39).

  <1.1.3 アクセスゲートウェイ主導によるセル分割処理フロー>
 図10はアクセスゲートウェイ400主導でセル分割が行われる場合の動作例を表すフローチャートである。
<1.1.3 Cell division processing flow led by access gateway>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell division is performed under the initiative of the access gateway 400.

 アクセスゲートウェイ400は処理を開始すると(S50)、基地局100においてトラフィック情報を収集する(S51)。 When the access gateway 400 starts processing (S50), the base station 100 collects traffic information (S51).

 次に、基地局100は、トラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したか否かを判別する(S52)。 Next, the base station 100 determines whether or not the traffic state has changed from the normal state to the congestion state (S52).

 基地局100は、トラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したことを検出すると(S52でYes)、通常状態から輻輳状態へと変化したことを示す負荷状態変化通知を生成し、生成した当該通知をアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する(S53)。例えば、セル制御部106は輻輳状態への状態遷移を検出すると、負荷状態変化通知を生成し、生成した負荷状態変化通知をTCP/IP送受信部110を介してアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。 When the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has transitioned from the normal state to the congestion state (Yes in S52), the base station 100 generates a load state change notification indicating that the traffic state has changed from the normal state to the congestion state. A notification is transmitted to the access gateway 400 (S53). For example, when detecting a state transition to a congestion state, the cell control unit 106 generates a load state change notification and transmits the generated load state change notification to the access gateway 400 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、負荷状態変化通知に基づいてトラフィック状況が通常状態から輻輳状態へと状態遷移していることから基地局100配下のセルを分割することを決定する(S54)。例えば、判定部407はトラフィック情報管理部403から負荷状態変化通知を受け取り、当該通知に基づいてセルの分割を決定する。 Next, the access gateway 400 decides to divide the cell under the base station 100 because the traffic state changes from the normal state to the congestion state based on the load state change notification (S54). For example, the determination unit 407 receives a load state change notification from the traffic information management unit 403, and determines cell division based on the notification.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、位置情報サーバ500から移動局200の位置情報を取得する(S55)。例えば、移動局位置情報管理部406は位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404などを介して位置情報サーバ500から位置情報を取得する。 Next, the access gateway 400 acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 from the location information server 500 (S55). For example, the mobile station location information management unit 406 acquires location information from the location information server 500 via the location information server-oriented TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 and the like.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、移動局200の分布状況から最適な分割となるアンテナ構成を決定する(S56)。例えば、判定部407は、セル制御部106と同様に、トラフィック情報に基づいて基地局100の負荷が輻輳状態閾値を超えたことを検出したとき、位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更して基地局配下のセルを分割することを決定する。この場合、判定部407は位置情報に基づいて移動局200の偏りを分析し、最適な分割となるアンテナ構成を決定する。判定部407は、基地局主導の場合(例えばS16)と同様に、分割後の各セルに配置される移動局200の個数が均一になるようにアンテナ構成を決定してもよい。 Next, the access gateway 400 determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided from the distribution status of the mobile station 200 (S56). For example, when the determination unit 407 detects that the load of the base station 100 exceeds the congestion state threshold based on the traffic information, similarly to the cell control unit 106, the determination unit 407 sets the first antenna configuration based on the position information. It is determined to change the configuration to the second configuration and divide the cells under the base station. In this case, the determination unit 407 analyzes the bias of the mobile station 200 based on the position information, and determines an antenna configuration that is optimally divided. The determination unit 407 may determine the antenna configuration so that the number of mobile stations 200 arranged in each divided cell is uniform, as in the case of the base station initiative (for example, S16).

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、新規セルに配置するハンドオーバ対象の移動局200を位置情報から決定する(S57)。例えば、判定部407は分割後の各セルにおいてセルIDが変更となったセルに在圏する移動局200を位置情報に基づいて決定する。 Next, the access gateway 400 determines the handover target mobile station 200 to be arranged in the new cell from the location information (S57). For example, the determination unit 407 determines the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID has been changed in each divided cell based on the location information.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、アンテナ構成(又は第2の構成への変更指示)とハンドオーバ対象の移動局200の情報を基地局100へ送信する(S58)。例えば、判定部407は、分割したセルに対応するアンテナ構成(又は第2の構成への変更指示)とS57で決定したハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に関する情報を基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401を介して基地局100へ送信する。 Next, the access gateway 400 transmits the antenna configuration (or the instruction to change to the second configuration) and information on the mobile station 200 to be handed over to the base station 100 (S58). For example, the determination unit 407 uses the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station to transmit information regarding the antenna configuration (or the instruction to change to the second configuration) corresponding to the divided cells and the mobile station 200 to be handed over determined in S57. To the base station 100.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に対する新規セルへのハンドオーバ制御の実行を基地局100へ指示する(S59)。例えば、判定部407が該移動局200に対してハンドオーバを実行するよう基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401を介して基地局100へ指示する。 Next, the access gateway 400 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover control to the new cell for the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S59). For example, the determination unit 407 instructs the base station 100 via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for the base station to execute handover for the mobile station 200.

 そして、アクセスゲートウェイ400は一連の処理を終了させる(S60)。 Then, the access gateway 400 ends a series of processes (S60).

 一方、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、通常状態から輻輳状態への状態遷移を示す負荷状態変化通知を基地局100から受信しないとき(S52でNo)、アンテナ構成の決定などの処理を行うことなく、一連の処理を終了させる(S60)。 On the other hand, when the access gateway 400 does not receive the load state change notification indicating the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state from the base station 100 (No in S52), the access gateway 400 performs a series of processes without performing the process such as the determination of the antenna configuration. The process is terminated (S60).

 <1.2.セル統合処理フロー>
  <1.2.1 基地局主導によるセル統合処理フロー>
 図11は基地局主導でセル統合が行われる場合の動作例を表すフローチャートである。
<1.2. Cell integration processing flow>
<1.2.1 Cell integration processing flow led by base station>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell integration is performed under the initiative of a base station.

 基地局100は処理を開始すると(S70)、トラフィック情報を収集する(S72)。 When the base station 100 starts processing (S70), it collects traffic information (S72).

 次に、基地局100はトラフィック情報に基づいてトラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へ遷移したか否かを判別する(S72)。例えば、セル制御部106は、トラフィック情報により示される値が通常状態閾値より小さくなると輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出し、当該値が通常状態閾値以上のときは輻輳状態が維持されていることを検出する。状態遷移の対象となるものは、例えば、基地局100配下のセル内における負荷でもよいし、基地局100自体の負荷でもよく、基地局100におけるこのような負荷が減少したことが検出できればよい。以降においても同様である。 Next, the base station 100 determines whether or not the traffic state has changed from the congestion state to the normal state based on the traffic information (S72). For example, the cell control unit 106 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state when the value indicated by the traffic information becomes smaller than the normal state threshold, and the congestion state is maintained when the value is equal to or greater than the normal state threshold. Detect that The target of the state transition may be, for example, a load in a cell under the base station 100 or a load of the base station 100 itself, as long as it can detect that such a load in the base station 100 has decreased. The same applies to the following.

 基地局100は輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出すると(S72でYes)、基地局100配下のセルを統合することを決定する(S73)。例えば、セル制御部106は輻輳状態から通常状態への遷移を検出するとセルを統合することを決定する。 When the base station 100 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state (Yes in S72), the base station 100 determines to integrate cells under the base station 100 (S73). For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects a transition from a congestion state to a normal state, the cell control unit 106 determines to integrate cells.

 次に、基地局100は、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400へ移動局200の位置情報の収集を要求する(S74)。 Next, the base station 100 requests the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 to collect location information of the mobile station 200 (S74).

 次に、基地局100は、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400が位置情報サーバ500から位置情報を取得後、取得した位置情報を基地局100へ送信することで、当該位置情報を受信する(S75)。 Next, after the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 acquires the position information from the position information server 500, the base station 100 receives the position information by transmitting the acquired position information to the base station 100 (S75). .

 次に、基地局100は、統合されるセルに在圏し、ハンドオーバ対象となる移動局200を抽出する(S76)。例えば、セル制御部106は、移動局位置情報管理部109から取得した移動局200の位置情報に基づいて、統合後のセルにおいてセルIDが変更されるセルに在圏する移動局200を抽出してもよい。例えば、このような移動局200がセル統合後においてハンドオーバ対象となり得る。 Next, the base station 100 is located in the cell to be integrated and extracts the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S76). For example, the cell control unit 106 extracts the mobile station 200 located in the cell whose cell ID is changed in the cell after integration based on the location information of the mobile station 200 acquired from the mobile station location information management unit 109. May be. For example, such a mobile station 200 can be a handover target after cell integration.

 次に、基地局100は、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に対して統合後のセルへのハンドオーバ制御を実行する(S77)。例えば、セル制御部106は、セルの統合をアンテナ制御部107へ指示し、制御信号処理部105に対して統合のセルにおいてハンドオーバ対象となる移動局200に対してハンドオーバの実行を指示する。基地局100は制御信号処理部105を介して該移動局200との間で制御信号を交換するなどしてハンドオーバ処理を行う。 Next, the base station 100 executes handover control to the cell after integration for the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S77). For example, the cell control unit 106 instructs the antenna control unit 107 to perform cell integration, and instructs the control signal processing unit 105 to execute handover to the mobile station 200 that is a handover target in the integrated cell. The base station 100 performs handover processing by exchanging control signals with the mobile station 200 via the control signal processing unit 105.

 そして、基地局100は一連の処理を終了させる(S78)。 Then, the base station 100 ends a series of processes (S78).

 一方、基地局100はトラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移していないことを検出したとき(S72でNo)、セルの統合などを行うことなく一連の処理を終了させる(S78)。 On the other hand, when the base station 100 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the congestion state to the normal state (No in S72), the base station 100 ends the series of processes without performing cell integration (S78).

  <1.2.2 保守システム主導によるセル統合処理フロー>
 図12は保守システム300主導でセル統合が行われる場合の動作例を表すフローチャートである。
<1.2.2 Maintenance system led cell integration processing flow>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell integration is performed under the initiative of the maintenance system 300.

 保守システム300は処理を開始すると(S90)、基地局100からトラフィック情報を収集し(S91)、収集したトラフィック情報に基づいてトラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移したか否かを判別する(S92)。例えば、判定部307はトラフィック情報により示された値が通常状態閾値より小さくなると輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出し、当該値が通常状態閾値以上のときは輻輳状態が維持されていることを検出する。 When the maintenance system 300 starts processing (S90), it collects traffic information from the base station 100 (S91), and determines whether the traffic status has changed from a congestion state to a normal state based on the collected traffic information. (S92). For example, the determination unit 307 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state when the value indicated by the traffic information becomes smaller than the normal state threshold, and the congestion state is maintained when the value is equal to or greater than the normal state threshold. Detect that.

 保守システム300は、輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出すると(S92)、セルの統合を決定し(S93)、位置情報サーバ500から移動局200の位置情報を取得する(S95)。例えば、判定部307は分割されたセルを統合して分割前のセルに戻すことを決定し、移動局位置情報管理部306を介して移動局200の位置情報を取得する。 When the maintenance system 300 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state (S92), the maintenance system 300 determines cell integration (S93), and acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 from the location information server 500 (S95). For example, the determination unit 307 determines to integrate the divided cells and return to the cell before the division, and acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 via the mobile station location information management unit 306.

 次に、保守システム300は、統合されるセルに在圏する移動局200を抽出する(S96)。例えば、判定部307は、移動局位置情報管理部306から取得した移動局200の位置情報に基づいて、統合後のセルにおいてセルIDが変更されるセルに在圏する移動局200を抽出してもよい。例えば、このような移動局200がセル統合後においてハンドオーバ対象となり得る。 Next, the maintenance system 300 extracts the mobile station 200 located in the cell to be integrated (S96). For example, the determination unit 307 extracts the mobile station 200 residing in the cell whose cell ID is changed in the integrated cell based on the location information of the mobile station 200 acquired from the mobile station location information management unit 306. Also good. For example, such a mobile station 200 can be a handover target after cell integration.

 次に、保守システム300は、決定したアンテナ構成とハンドオーバ対象の移動局200を基地局100へ指示する(S97)。例えば、判定部307は、統合後のセルに対応するアンテナ構成とS96で抽出した移動局200の情報を含むハンドオーバ対象移動局リストとを基地局100へ向けて送信する。 Next, the maintenance system 300 instructs the base station 100 of the determined antenna configuration and the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S97). For example, the determination unit 307 transmits, to the base station 100, the antenna configuration corresponding to the integrated cell and the handover target mobile station list including the information of the mobile station 200 extracted in S96.

 次に、保守システム300は、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に対する統合後のセルへのハンドオーバの実行を基地局100へ指示する(S98)。例えば、判定部307はハンドオーバ対象の移動局200を統合後のセルへハンドオーバさせることを基地局100へ指示する。 Next, the maintenance system 300 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover to the cell after integration for the mobile station 200 to be handed over (S98). For example, the determination unit 307 instructs the base station 100 to handover the handover target mobile station 200 to the integrated cell.

 そして、保守システム300は一連の処理を終了させる(S99)。 Then, the maintenance system 300 ends a series of processes (S99).

 一方、保守システム300はトラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移していないことを検出したとき(S92でNo)、セルの統合などの処理を行うことなく一連の処理を終了させる(S99)。 On the other hand, when the maintenance system 300 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the congestion state to the normal state (No in S92), the maintenance system 300 ends the series of processing without performing processing such as cell integration (S99). .

  <1.2.3 アクセスゲートウェイ主導によるセル統合処理フロー>
 図13はアクセスゲートウェイ主導でセル統合が行われる場合の動作例を表すフローチャートである。
<1.2.3 Cell integration processing flow led by access gateway>
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation example when cell integration is performed under the initiative of the access gateway.

 アクセスゲートウェイ400は処理を開始すると(S110)、基地局100はトラフィック情報を収集して(S111)、トラフィック情報に基づいてトラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移したか否かを判別する(S112)。 When the access gateway 400 starts processing (S110), the base station 100 collects traffic information (S111), and determines whether the traffic status has changed from the congestion state to the normal state based on the traffic information (S111). S112).

 基地局100は、輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移を判別すると(S112でYes)、輻輳状態から通常状態へと状態遷移したことを示す負荷状態変化通知をアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。例えば、セル制御部106は輻輳状態閾値に基づき輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出すると、輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を示す負荷状態変化通知を生成し、TCP/IP送受信部110を介してアクセスゲートウェイ400へ送信する。 When the base station 100 determines the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state (Yes in S112), the base station 100 transmits a load state change notification indicating the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state to the access gateway 400. For example, when the cell control unit 106 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state based on the congestion state threshold, the cell control unit 106 generates a load state change notification indicating the state transition from the congestion state to the normal state, and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. To the access gateway 400.

 そして、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、負荷状態変化通知によりトラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へと遷移したことを検出すると基地局100配下のセルの統合を決定する(S113)。例えば、判定部407は分割されたセルを統合して分割前のセルに戻すことを決定してもよい。 Then, when the access gateway 400 detects that the traffic state has changed from the congestion state to the normal state by the load state change notification, the access gateway 400 determines the integration of the cells under the base station 100 (S113). For example, the determination unit 407 may determine to integrate the divided cells and return to the cell before the division.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は位置情報サーバ500から移動局200の位置情報を取得し(S115)、位置情報に基づいて統合後のセルに在圏する移動局200を抽出する(S116)。例えば、判定部407は位置情報に基づいて、統合後のセルにおいてセルIDが変更されるセルに在圏する移動局200を抽出してもよい。 Next, the access gateway 400 acquires the location information of the mobile station 200 from the location information server 500 (S115), and extracts the mobile station 200 located in the integrated cell based on the location information (S116). For example, the determination unit 407 may extract the mobile station 200 residing in the cell whose cell ID is changed in the integrated cell based on the location information.

 次に、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に対する統合後のセルへのハンドオーバの実行を基地局100へ指示する(S117)。例えば、判定部407は、ハンドオーバ対象の移動局200を統合後のセルへハンドオーバさせることを基地局100へ指示する。この場合、判定部407は、統合後のセルに対応するアンテナ構成を基地局100へ送信してもよい。 Next, the access gateway 400 instructs the base station 100 to execute handover to the cell after integration with respect to the handover target mobile station 200 (S117). For example, the determination unit 407 instructs the base station 100 to handover the handover target mobile station 200 to the integrated cell. In this case, the determination unit 407 may transmit the antenna configuration corresponding to the integrated cell to the base station 100.

 そして、アクセスゲートウェイ400は一連の処理を終了させる(S118)。 Then, the access gateway 400 ends a series of processes (S118).

 一方、アクセスゲートウェイ400は、トラフィック状況が輻輳状態から通常状態へ状態遷移していないことを検出したとき(S112でNo)、セルの統合などの処理を行うことなく一連の処理を終了させる(S118)。 On the other hand, when the access gateway 400 detects that the traffic state has not changed from the congestion state to the normal state (No in S112), the access gateway 400 ends the series of processing without performing processing such as cell integration (S118). ).

 <2.セル分割時の処理>
 上述したように、保守システム300又は基地局100は、トラフィック情報に基づいて通常状態から輻輳状態への状態遷移を検出するとセルの分割を決定する。また、保守システム300又は基地局100では、セルの分割により新規セルに配置する移動局200に対してハンドオーバの実行も指示する。
<2. Processing when dividing cells>
As described above, when the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 detects a state transition from the normal state to the congestion state based on the traffic information, it determines cell division. The maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 also instructs the mobile station 200 arranged in the new cell to execute handover by dividing the cell.

 この際、基地局100は、分割後の新規セルへハンドオーバさせる移動局200に対して、セル分割に要する時間を自身の負荷状況から判別する。セル分割に要する時間(以下、「処理時間」と称する場合がある。)としては、例えば、基地局100のCPU(Central Processing Unit)の使用率に対する処理時間や無線リソースの割り当て率などであってもよい。このような数値は計算により算出されてもよいし、事前定義されたものを用いてもよい。そして、基地局100は、ハンドオーバ先の基地局との同期処理について移動局主導(non-contention(非競合モード))で行うか又は基地局主導(contention(競合モード))で行うかを処理時間に基づいて決定する。 At this time, the base station 100 determines the time required for cell division for the mobile station 200 to be handed over to the new cell after division from its own load status. The time required for cell division (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “processing time”) is, for example, the processing time with respect to the usage rate of the CPU (Central Processing Unit) of the base station 100 and the allocation rate of radio resources. Also good. Such a numerical value may be calculated or a predefined value may be used. Then, the base station 100 determines whether the synchronization processing with the handover destination base station is performed by the mobile station (non-contention (non-contention mode)) or the base station (contention (contention mode)). Determine based on.

 例えば、基地局100は、セル分割に要する処理時間が基準値以上のとき、基地局主導で同期処理を行うことを決定する。これは、処理時間が基準値以上かかる場合において、同期処理を移動局主導で行わせると、セルの分割に要する時間が基準値以上かかるにも拘わらず移動局200から同期処理の要求が何度も送信され、移動局200の消費電力は通常値以上の電力を要することになる。そこで、このような場合は、基地局主導で同期処理を行わせることで、セル分割処理中は移動局200では同期処理を待ち合わせ、セル分割終了後に基地局100からの要求により同期処理が開始されることで、移動局200の消費電力は移動局主導の場合よりも削減可能となる。 For example, when the processing time required for cell division is equal to or greater than a reference value, the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the base station. This is because, when the processing time takes more than the reference value, if the synchronization processing is led by the mobile station, the mobile station 200 makes many requests for the synchronization processing even though the time required for cell division takes more than the reference value. The power consumption of the mobile station 200 requires more power than the normal value. Therefore, in such a case, by performing synchronization processing led by the base station, the mobile station 200 waits for synchronization processing during cell division processing, and synchronization processing is started by a request from the base station 100 after cell division is completed. Thus, the power consumption of the mobile station 200 can be reduced as compared with the case where the mobile station takes the initiative.

 一方、例えば、セル分割に要する処理時間が基準値未満のとき、基地局100は移動局主導で同期処理を行うことを決定する。これは、セル分割による処理時間が基準値未満となっているため、移動局主導で同期処理を行わせても、移動局200の消費電力は通常値以上とはならないからである。 On the other hand, for example, when the processing time required for cell division is less than the reference value, the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the mobile station. This is because the processing time due to cell division is less than the reference value, and thus the power consumption of the mobile station 200 does not exceed the normal value even if the synchronization processing is performed under the initiative of the mobile station.

 同期処理について基地局主導で行うか移動局主導で行うかは、例えば、基地局100のセル制御部106で行われもよい。セル制御部106は、保守システム300から変更後のアンテナ構成の指示を受けて、或いは自身でアンテナ構成を決定後、処理時間と基準値を比較して決定してもよい。 Whether the synchronization processing is performed by the base station or the mobile station may be performed by the cell control unit 106 of the base station 100, for example. The cell control unit 106 may receive the instruction of the changed antenna configuration from the maintenance system 300 or may determine the antenna configuration by comparing the processing time with the reference value after determining the antenna configuration.

 以下では、基地局主導で同期処理が行われる場合と移動局主導で同期処理が行われる場合で分けて、同期処理を含むハンドオーバシーケンスの例を説明する。 Hereinafter, an example of a handover sequence including the synchronization process will be described by dividing the case where the synchronization process is performed by the base station and the case where the synchronization process is performed by the mobile station.

 <2.1 基地局主導(非競合モード)の同期処理>
  <2.1.1 セル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンス(非競合モード)>
 図14及び図15は、非競合モード(基地局主導)により同期処理が行われる場合のセル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す。また、図14及び図15はセル分割の決定は基地局100で行われる場合の例である。図14及び図15に示す各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。
<2.1 Base station-initiated (non-contention mode) synchronization processing>
<2.1.1 Handover sequence by cell division (non-contention mode)>
14 and 15 show an example of a handover sequence by cell division when synchronization processing is performed in the non-contention mode (base station initiative). 14 and 15 show examples in which the cell division decision is performed by the base station 100. FIG. Each process illustrated in FIGS. 14 and 15 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 図14では、セル分割により、基地局100-1配下のセル#1がセル#1とセル#2の2つに分割される例を表し、分割後のセル#2に2つの移動局200-1,200-2が配置される例を表している。この場合、2つの移動局200-1,200-2がセル#1からセル#2へのハンドオーバ対象の移動局となる。 FIG. 14 shows an example in which cell # 1 subordinate to base station 100-1 is divided into cell # 1 and cell # 2 by cell division, and two mobile stations 200- In this example, 1,200-2 is arranged. In this case, the two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are mobile stations to be handed over from the cell # 1 to the cell # 2.

 基地局100-1は、トラフィック情報を取得し、取得したトラフィック情報を保守システムへ送信する(S120)。例えば、基地局100-1はトラフィック情報を取得すると定期的にトラフィック情報を保守システム300へ送信する。 The base station 100-1 acquires the traffic information and transmits the acquired traffic information to the maintenance system (S120). For example, when the base station 100-1 acquires the traffic information, the base station 100-1 periodically transmits the traffic information to the maintenance system 300.

 次に、基地局100-1は、セルを分割するか否かを判別する(S121)。基地局100-1は、トラフィック情報に基づいて通常状態から輻輳状態へ状態遷移したか否かにより、セルを分割するか否かを決定する。 Next, the base station 100-1 determines whether or not to divide the cell (S121). Base station 100-1 determines whether or not to divide a cell based on whether or not the state transition from the normal state to the congestion state is performed based on the traffic information.

 基地局100-1は、配下のセルを分割することを決定すると(S121でYes)、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400を介して位置情報サーバ500から位置情報を取得する(S122)。 When the base station 100-1 determines to divide the subordinate cell (Yes in S121), the base station 100-1 acquires location information from the location information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 (S122).

 次に、基地局100-1は、取得した位置情報に基づいて、基地局100-1に接続する移動局200の位置の偏りを分析し、セル#2の構成を決定する(S123)。この場合、基地局100-1は、セル分割に要する処理時間が基準値より長いと判断して基地局主導の同期処理を行うことを決定する。 Next, the base station 100-1 analyzes the positional deviation of the mobile station 200 connected to the base station 100-1 based on the acquired location information, and determines the configuration of the cell # 2 (S123). In this case, the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell division is longer than the reference value, and determines to perform base station-led synchronization processing.

 そして、基地局100-1は、分割後のセル#2に配置された移動局200-1,200-2に対してハンドオーバ開始指示を送信する(S124,S125)。 The base station 100-1 transmits a handover start instruction to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 arranged in the divided cell # 2 (S124, S125).

 本第2の実施の形態においては、ハンドオーバ開始指示に含まれる新規のパラメータとして3つのパラメータを通知する。 In the second embodiment, three parameters are notified as new parameters included in the handover start instruction.

 1つ目のパラメータは「Cell Deployment Indicator」である。「Cell Deployment Indicator」は、例えば、ハンドオーバ監視条件を無効化するか否かを表すパラメータである。又は、「Cell Deployment Indicator」は、例えば、移動局200に対して、基地局100においてセル分割又はセル統合が行われるという状況を通知するものである。移動局200では本パラメータの通知により、基地局100においてセル分割又はセル統合が並行して実施されることを把握し、通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(例えばLTEのT304)を無効化することが可能となる。このようなハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマは、例えば、基地局100から指示されて移動局200側で設定するタイマである。本パラメータにより、例えば、ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマが満了するためにセル分割又はセル統合が完了しない場合のハンドオーバ失敗となる事象を抑止させることが可能となる。 The first parameter is “Cell Deployment Indicator”. “Cell Deployment Indicator” is, for example, a parameter indicating whether or not to disable the handover monitoring condition. Alternatively, the “Cell Deployment Indicator” notifies the mobile station 200 of the situation where cell division or cell integration is performed in the base station 100, for example. The mobile station 200 can recognize that cell division or cell integration is performed in parallel in the base station 100 by notifying this parameter, and can invalidate a normal handover completion waiting timer (for example, LTE T304). It becomes. Such a handover completion waiting timer is, for example, a timer that is instructed by the base station 100 and set on the mobile station 200 side. With this parameter, for example, an event that causes a handover failure when cell division or cell integration is not completed because a handover completion waiting timer expires can be suppressed.

 2つ目のパラメータは「Wait Time」である。「Wait Time」は、例えば、無効化されたハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマに代わりセル分割処理完了までの時間を保証する監視タイマである。又は、「Wait Time」は、例えば、基地局100がセル分割又はセル統合処理完了するまでに要する処理時間(又は最大処理時間)と移動局200との同期処理実行の保証時間を示している。そのため、本パラメータは、運用者によるシステム検証において、様々な条件下でセル分割又はセル統合処理に要する時間を測定することで決定されることが望ましい。また、本パラメータは様々な条件(呼処理による負荷やCPU使用率など)に対してそれぞれの条件に対する最大処理時間を個々に定義することも可能であり、想定される全ての条件における最大処理時間を定義することも可能である。LTEにおけるハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(T304)は、3GPPにおいてその設定範囲が「100ms、200ms、500ms、1000ms、2000ms、4000ms、8000ms」となっており最大でも8秒間の待ち合わせとなる。本パラメータは、基地局100におけるセル分割又は統合処理をハンドオーバ制約により、この期間内で完了させることを回避し、基地局100に依存した処理時間を「Wait Time」で指示することでより長時間(例えば、1sから3600sなど)の指定が可能となる。例えば、「Wait Time」により示される時間は、移動局200においてハンドオーバ処理を開始してから終了するまでの時間として設定された時間よりも長い時間としてもよい。本パラメータにより、例えば、「Cell Deployment Indicator」により無効化されたハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマの代用するタイマとして「Wait Time」が用いられ、基地局100に依存したセル分割又はセル統合処理に合せたハンドオーバ処理が可能となる。 The second parameter is “Wait Time”. “Wait Time” is, for example, a monitoring timer that guarantees the time until cell division processing is completed instead of the invalidated handover completion waiting timer. Alternatively, “Wait Time” indicates, for example, the processing time (or the maximum processing time) required until the base station 100 completes the cell division or cell integration processing and the guaranteed time for executing the synchronization processing with the mobile station 200. Therefore, this parameter is desirably determined by measuring the time required for cell division or cell integration processing under various conditions in system verification by the operator. In addition, this parameter can individually define the maximum processing time for each condition under various conditions (call processing load, CPU usage rate, etc.), and the maximum processing time under all assumed conditions. Can also be defined. The handover completion waiting timer (T304) in LTE has a setting range of “100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 4000 ms, and 8000 ms” in 3GPP, and is waiting for a maximum of 8 seconds. This parameter avoids completing the cell division or integration process in the base station 100 within this period due to handover restrictions, and indicates a longer processing time by indicating the processing time depending on the base station 100 with “Wait Time”. (For example, 1s to 3600s) can be specified. For example, the time indicated by “Wait Time” may be longer than the time set as the time until the mobile station 200 starts the handover process and ends it. With this parameter, for example, “Wait Time” is used as a substitute for the handover completion waiting timer invalidated by “Cell Deployment Indicator”, and handover processing according to cell division or cell integration processing depending on base station 100 Is possible.

 3つ目のパラメータは「Sync Mode」である。「Sync Mode」は、例えば、同期処理を基地局主導(非競合モード)で行うのか又は移動局主導(競合モード)で行うのかを示す。例えば、「Sync Mode=非競合モード」のときは、同期処理が基地局主導で行われ、「Sync Mode=競合モード」のときは、同期処理が移動局主導で行われることを示す。上述したように、セル分割又はセル統合処理は基地局100性能に依存することが考えられるため、一般的に用いられる競合モード(移動局主導)による同期確立処理では移動局200側が同期確立処理失敗により、送信電力を増加させて再送を繰り返すことになる。従って、この場合、移動局200の消費電力が課題となる場合がある。そのため、基地局100では「Wait Time」を基準に、セル分割又はセル統合に要する時間が基準値より短い場合は競合モード、基準値以上と長い場合は非競合モード(基地局主導)と使い分けることで移動局200の負担を軽減することが可能となる。また、同期処理確率処理の衝突により無応答を回避するためにも、非競合モードによる同期確立処理が望ましいが、セル分割又はセル統合処理に要する時間の長短と基地局100側が同期確立処理を指示する処理負担を考慮して、「Sync Mode」を適切に定義することが望ましい。 The third parameter is “Sync Mode”. “Sync Mode” indicates, for example, whether the synchronization processing is performed by the base station (non-contention mode) or the mobile station (competition mode). For example, when “Sync Mode = non-contention mode”, the synchronization processing is performed by the base station, and when “Sync Mode = contention mode”, the synchronization processing is performed by the mobile station. As described above, since the cell division or cell integration process may depend on the performance of the base station 100, the mobile station 200 side fails in the synchronization establishment process in the commonly used contention mode (driven by the mobile station). Thus, retransmission is repeated while increasing the transmission power. Therefore, in this case, the power consumption of the mobile station 200 may be a problem. Therefore, the base station 100 uses the “Wait Time” as a reference when the time required for cell division or cell integration is shorter than the reference value, and when it is longer than the reference value, it is used as the non-contention mode (base station initiative). Thus, the burden on the mobile station 200 can be reduced. Further, in order to avoid no response due to collision of synchronization processing probability processing, synchronization establishment processing in non-contention mode is desirable, but the length of time required for cell division or cell integration processing and the base station 100 side instructs synchronization establishment processing It is desirable to appropriately define “Sync Mode” in consideration of the processing burden to be performed.

 例えば、「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode=非競合モード」が通知された場合、移動局200は通常使用するハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマを無効化し、「Wait Time」で示される時間待ち合わせを行う。 For example, when “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode = non-competing mode” are notified, the mobile station 200 invalidates the normally used handover completion waiting timer, and is indicated by “Wait Time”. I will wait for a long time.

 「Sync Mode=非競合モード」の場合、同期確立指示要求が基地局100から移動局200へ送信されることになる。そのため、セル分割又はセル統合にかかる最大処理時間(以下、「最大処理時間」と称する場合がある)に基地局主導の同期確立指示要求が移動局200へ到達するまでの無線区間の最大伝送遅延時間(又は「タイムラグ」。以下、「最大伝送遅延時間」)を考慮した時間(例えば、「最大処理時間」+「最大伝送遅延時間」)を「Wait Time」としてもよい。或いは、更に同期確立指示要求の再送回数及び再送間隔を考慮した時間(例えば、「最大処理時間」+「最大伝送遅延時間」×「再送回数」+「再送間隔」×「再送回数-1」)を「Wait Time」としてもよい。非競合モードの場合、移動局200におけるタイマが最大処理時間になった時に基地局主導の同期確立指示要求が基地局100から送信される場合もある。このような場合でも、移動局200において同期処理を行うことができなくなるリスクを回避するために、「Wait Time」について最大伝送遅延時間などを考慮している。移動局200は、「Wait Time」期間満了後、基地局100からの同期確立処理要求を待ち合わせ、当該要求を受信すると同期処理を開始する。 In the case of “Sync Mode = non-contention mode”, a synchronization establishment instruction request is transmitted from the base station 100 to the mobile station 200. Therefore, the maximum transmission delay in the radio section until the base station-initiated synchronization establishment instruction request arrives at the mobile station 200 during the maximum processing time for cell division or cell integration (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “maximum processing time”). Time (or “time lag”, hereinafter “maximum transmission delay time”) taking into account the time (for example, “maximum processing time” + “maximum transmission delay time”) may be set as “Wait Time”. Alternatively, a time considering the number of retransmissions and the retransmission interval of the synchronization establishment instruction request (for example, “maximum processing time” + “maximum transmission delay time” × “retransmission number” + “retransmission interval” × “retransmission number−1”) May be “Wait Time”. In the non-contention mode, a base station-initiated synchronization establishment instruction request may be transmitted from the base station 100 when the timer in the mobile station 200 reaches the maximum processing time. Even in such a case, in order to avoid the risk that the mobile station 200 cannot perform the synchronization process, the maximum transmission delay time is considered for “Wait Time”. After the “Wait Time” period expires, the mobile station 200 waits for a synchronization establishment processing request from the base station 100, and starts the synchronization processing when receiving the request.

 「Sync Mode=競合モード」の場合、移動局200におけるタイマが最大処理時間に到達前に基地局100におけるセル分割/セル統合の処理が完了した場合、移動局200から送信された同期確立指示要求は受信することができる。しかし、当該タイマが最大処理時間に到達した場合に同期処理に間に合わない可能性がある。そこで、競合モードの場合、最大処理時間に1回以上の再送を許容できる時間をマージンとして加算し、加算後の時間を「Wait Time」としてもよい。マージンは、例えば、再送回数(LTEでは最大値preambleTransMaxパラメータ)、再送間隔(LTEでは最大値をBackoff Parameterで指定)から計算可能である。基地局100などでは再送回数を1回分の再送間隔最大値とすることで、アンテナ再構成に最大時間を要した場合でも移動局200において少なくとも1回の再送を保証することが可能となる。再送回数を何回分まで保証するかは、例えば、再送回数の範囲内においてオペレータなどが指定するようにしてもよい。 In the case of “Sync Mode = contention mode”, when the cell division / cell integration processing in the base station 100 is completed before the timer in the mobile station 200 reaches the maximum processing time, a synchronization establishment instruction request transmitted from the mobile station 200 Can receive. However, when the timer reaches the maximum processing time, there is a possibility that the synchronization processing is not in time. Therefore, in the case of the competitive mode, a time that allows one or more retransmissions is added as a margin to the maximum processing time, and the time after the addition may be “Wait Time”. The margin can be calculated from, for example, the number of retransmissions (maximum value preambleTransMax parameter in LTE) and the retransmission interval (maximum value specified in Backoff Parameter in LTE). In the base station 100 or the like, by setting the number of retransmissions to the maximum value for one retransmission interval, it is possible to guarantee at least one retransmission in the mobile station 200 even when the maximum time is required for antenna reconfiguration. For example, an operator or the like may specify the number of retransmissions to be guaranteed within the range of the number of retransmissions.

 このような3つのパラメータにより、例えば、基地局100に依存したセル分割処理に即したハンドオーバ条件を移動局200に与えて実施することが可能となる。また、3つのパラメータにより、通常のハンドオーバ待ち合わせタイマが無効化され、分割処理時間が保証されることになり、分割後のセルへのハンドオーバがタイムアウトにより行うことができない事態を回避することができる。従って、移動局200では、セル分割に伴って発生する分割後のセルへのハンドオーバが保証され、セル分割が行われた場合でも通信の継続性を確保することが可能となる。 With these three parameters, for example, it is possible to give the mobile station 200 a handover condition that is suitable for cell division processing depending on the base station 100, and to implement it. Further, the normal handover waiting timer is invalidated by the three parameters, and the division processing time is guaranteed, and a situation in which handover to the cell after division cannot be performed due to timeout can be avoided. Therefore, in the mobile station 200, handover to the cell after the division that occurs due to the cell division is guaranteed, and it is possible to ensure continuity of communication even when the cell division is performed.

 なお、このような3つのパラメータは、例えば、セル制御部106においてハンドオーバ開始指示(S124,S125)を生成する際に生成されてもよい。すなわち、セル制御部106は、ハンドオーバ開始指示を生成し、3つのパラメータを生成し、これらを制御信号処理部105へ出力する。制御信号処理部105はハンドオーバ開始指示と3つのパラメータなどを含む制御信号を生成し、送信電力制御部111などを介して移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する。当該制御信号は、例えば、ハンドオーバ開始指示(S124,S125)として移動局200-1,200-2へ送信される。 Note that these three parameters may be generated when, for example, the cell control unit 106 generates a handover start instruction (S124, S125). That is, the cell control unit 106 generates a handover start instruction, generates three parameters, and outputs them to the control signal processing unit 105. The control signal processing unit 105 generates a control signal including a handover start instruction and three parameters, and transmits the control signal to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 via the transmission power control unit 111 and the like. The control signal is transmitted to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 as, for example, a handover start instruction (S124, S125).

 図14に示す例では、ハンドオーバ開始指示には、更に、分割後のセルのセルID(=セル#2)、帯域、周波数などが含まれる。このようなパラメータも、例えば、セル制御部106において生成されてもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 14, the handover start instruction further includes a cell ID (= cell # 2), a band, a frequency, and the like of the cell after division. Such parameters may also be generated by the cell control unit 106, for example.

 基地局100-1では、ハンドオーバ開始指示を送信後、セルの分割を実行し(S126)、処理時間経過後、セル#2が分割され、セル#2を収容する基地局100-1は同期確立処理要求を2つの移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する(S127、図15のS131)。移動局200-1,200-2では、当該要求に従って、セル#2を収容する基地局100-1と同期処理を行い(S128、S129、図15のS132、S133)、同期確立後、ハンドオーバ完了通知を基地局100-1へ送信する(S130、図15のS134)。 After transmitting the handover start instruction, base station 100-1 executes cell division (S126). After the processing time has elapsed, cell # 2 is divided, and base station 100-1 accommodating cell # 2 establishes synchronization. A processing request is transmitted to the two mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S127, S131 in FIG. 15). In accordance with the request, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform synchronization processing with the base station 100-1 accommodating the cell # 2 (S128, S129, S132 and S133 in FIG. 15), and after the synchronization is established, the handover is completed. A notification is transmitted to the base station 100-1 (S130, S134 of FIG. 15).

 一方、基地局100-1はセル分割を行わないとき(S121でNo)、セル分割の処理などを行うことなく、一連の処理を終了させる。 On the other hand, when the base station 100-1 does not perform cell division (No in S121), the base station 100-1 ends the series of processing without performing cell division processing or the like.

  <2.1.2 セル分割によるハンドオーバ失敗時のロールバック(非競合モード)>
 図16は図14及び図15と同じ状況において基地局100-1においてセル分割が失敗した場合の動作例を表すシーケンス例である。図16で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。
<2.1.2 Rollback when handover fails due to cell division (non-contention mode)>
FIG. 16 is a sequence example illustrating an operation example when cell division fails in the base station 100-1 in the same situation as FIG. 14 and FIG. Each process illustrated in FIG. 16 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 基地局100-1においてセル分割処理を実行するものの(S126)、処理時間が経過してもセル分割処理が終了しなかったとき、セル分割が失敗することになる(S141)。 Although the base station 100-1 performs the cell division process (S126), if the cell division process is not completed even after the processing time elapses, the cell division fails (S141).

 一方、移動局200-1,200-2では、ハンドオーバ開始指示(S124,S125)により、「Wait Time」で示された時間待ち合わせを行い、その間、基地局100からの同期確立処理要求の受信を待ち合わせる。しかし、移動局200-1,200-2は、「Wait Time」で示された時間経過しても、基地局100-1から同期確立処理要求を受信しない。これにより、移動局200-1,200-2ではセル分割処理が失敗したことを検出することが可能となる。 On the other hand, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 wait for the time indicated by “Wait Time” in response to the handover start instruction (S124, S125), and receive a synchronization establishment processing request from the base station 100 during that time. Wait. However, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 do not receive the synchronization establishment processing request from the base station 100-1 even after the time indicated by “Wait Time” has elapsed. As a result, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can detect that the cell division process has failed.

 基地局100-1においてセル分割が失敗しても、分割後のセル配置には元セル(セル#1)が残る。従って、移動局200-1,200-2では、通常のハンドオーバ失敗時に行う再接続処理を回避し、元セルへのロールバックを行う(S142)。これにより、例えば、移動局200-1,200-2は再接続処理による制御信号などの送受信を行うことなく元セルへの接続を行うことが可能となり、通信の継続性を確保し、移動局200-1,200-2の消費電力削減も可能となる。 Even if cell division fails in base station 100-1, the original cell (cell # 1) remains in the cell arrangement after division. Therefore, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 avoid the reconnection process that is performed when a normal handover fails, and roll back to the original cell (S142). As a result, for example, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can connect to the original cell without performing transmission / reception of a control signal or the like by reconnection processing, ensuring continuity of communication, It is possible to reduce the power consumption of 200-1 and 200-2.

 図16の例では移動局200-1が元セルへのロールバックを行っている例を表しているが、移動局200-2がロールバックを行ってもよい。 FIG. 16 illustrates an example in which the mobile station 200-1 performs rollback to the original cell, but the mobile station 200-2 may perform rollback.

 ただし、移動局200-1,200-2において、基地局100-1と隣接する隣接基地局100-2配下のセルの受信強度が最上位を検出したとき、移動局200は当該基地局(又は当該セル)に対してハンドオーバ、若しくは再接続手順を実行してもよい(S143)。 However, in the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2, when the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 adjacent to the base station 100-1 is detected as the highest, the mobile station 200 determines that the base station (or A handover or reconnection procedure may be executed for the cell) (S143).

 <2.2 移動局主導(競合モード)の同期処理>
  <2.2.1 セル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンス(競合モード)>
 次に、競合モード(移動局主導)により同期処理が行われる場合のセル分割によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を説明する。図17及び図18はかかる場合のシーケンス例を表す図である。図17及び図18に示す各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。
<2.2 Synchronization process initiated by the mobile station (contention mode)>
<2.2.1 Handover sequence by cell division (contention mode)>
Next, an example of a handover sequence by cell division when the synchronization process is performed in the contention mode (initiated by the mobile station) will be described. FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a sequence example in such a case. The processes shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 基地局100-1では、セル分割に要する処理時間が基準値以下と判別したとき、同期処理を移動局主導(競合モード)で行わせることを決定する(S123)。この場合、基地局100-1では、「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode=競合モード」を含むハンドオーバ開始指示をハンドオーバ対象の移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する(S150,S151)。 When the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell division is equal to or less than the reference value, the base station 100-1 determines that the synchronization processing is performed by the mobile station (contention mode) (S123). In this case, the base station 100-1 transmits a handover start instruction including “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode = contention mode” to the target mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. (S150, S151).

 そして、基地局100-1ではセル分割を実行し(S126)、移動局200-1,200-2では同期確立指示要求を新規セル(セル#2)へ送信し、当該要求に対する応答を待機する(S152,S153)。移動局200-1,200-2は、「Wait Time」で指定された期間、要求の送信と待機を繰り返す。 Then, base station 100-1 performs cell division (S126), and mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 transmit a synchronization establishment instruction request to a new cell (cell # 2) and wait for a response to the request. (S152, S153). The mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 repeat the request transmission and standby for the period specified by “Wait Time”.

 そして、基地局100-1においてセル分割が実行されると、移動局200-1は同期確立指示要求(S154)に対する応答を基地局100-1から受信し(S155)、セル#2を収容する基地局100-1との間で同期処理を行う。移動局200-1は基地局100-1との同期を確立させると、ハンドオーバ完了通知を基地局100-1へ送信する(S156)。移動局200-2においても同様の処理が行われる(図18のS157~S159)。 When cell division is executed in base station 100-1, mobile station 200-1 receives a response to synchronization establishment instruction request (S154) from base station 100-1 (S155), and accommodates cell # 2. Synchronization processing is performed with the base station 100-1. When the mobile station 200-1 establishes synchronization with the base station 100-1, the mobile station 200-1 transmits a handover completion notification to the base station 100-1 (S156). Similar processing is performed in the mobile station 200-2 (S157 to S159 in FIG. 18).

  <2.2.2 セル分割によるハンドオーバ失敗時のロールバック(競合モード)>
 図19はセル分割が失敗した場合のシーケンス例を表している。図19で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。
<2.2.2 Rollback when handover fails due to cell division (contention mode)>
FIG. 19 shows a sequence example when cell division fails. Each process illustrated in FIG. 19 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 基地局100-1においてセル分割処理を実行するものの(S126)、処理時間が経過してもセル分割処理が終了しなかったとき、セル分割が失敗したことになる(S141)。 Although the cell division process is executed in the base station 100-1 (S126), if the cell division process is not completed even after the processing time has elapsed, the cell division has failed (S141).

 移動局主導(競合モード)による同期処理の場合、移動局200-1,200-2は同期確立指示要求をセル#2を収容する基地局100-1へ送信する(S161~S163)。しかし、セル#2の分割は失敗しているため、基地局100-1において同期確立指示要求を受信することはできない。この場合、移動局200-1,200-2では、「Wait Time」で指定された期間が満了しても同期確立指示要求に対する応答を受信しないことで、基地局100-1でのセル分割の失敗を検知することが可能となる。 In the case of synchronization processing initiated by the mobile station (contention mode), the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 transmit a synchronization establishment instruction request to the base station 100-1 that accommodates the cell # 2 (S161 to S163). However, since division of cell # 2 has failed, the base station 100-1 cannot receive the synchronization establishment instruction request. In this case, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 do not receive a response to the synchronization establishment instruction request even when the period specified by “Wait Time” expires, so that the base station 100-1 does not perform cell division. It becomes possible to detect failure.

 この場合、基地局100主導による同期処理(例えば図16)と同様に、セル分割が失敗しても分割後のセル配置には元セル(セル#1)が残るため、移動局200-1,200-2では元セルへのロールバックを行う(S142)。移動局200-1,200-2で通常のハンドオーバ失敗時に行う再接続手順を回避して、再接続処理による制御信号などの送受信を行うことなく元セルへの接続が可能となり、通信の継続性を確保し、移動局200-1,200-2の消費電力削減も可能となる。 In this case, as in the synchronization process led by the base station 100 (for example, FIG. 16), even if the cell division fails, the original cell (cell # 1) remains in the cell arrangement after the division. In 200-2, rollback to the original cell is performed (S142). The mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can avoid the reconnection procedure performed when a normal handover fails, and can connect to the original cell without transmitting / receiving control signals and the like by the reconnection process, thereby enabling communication continuity. And the power consumption of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can be reduced.

 ただし、移動局200-1,200-2は、隣接する基地局100-2配下のセルの受信強度を最上位に検出した場合、該基地局100-2へハンドオーバ、若しくは再接続手順を行ってもよい(S143)。 However, when the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 detect the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 at the highest level, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform a handover or reconnection procedure to the base station 100-2. It is good (S143).

 <2.3 隣接基地局から分割処理中新規セルへのハンドオーバ>
 セル分割を実行する基地局100-1と隣接する隣接基地局100-2では、隣接基地局100-2配下に在圏する移動局200が新規セルへハンドオーバする場合がある。
<2.3 Handover from neighboring base station to new cell during segmentation>
In the adjacent base station 100-2 that is adjacent to the base station 100-1 that performs cell division, the mobile station 200 located under the adjacent base station 100-2 may be handed over to a new cell.

 本第2の実施の形態では、セル分割を実行する基地局100-1は、隣接基地局100-2へ構成変更通知を通知する。構成変更通知には、例えば、3つのパラメータ「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」が含まれる。これにより、例えば、隣接基地局100-2では基地局100-1でセル分割が実行されることを把握でき、新規セルへのハンドオーバ実行時において通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(例えば、LTEではTRELOCprepとTX2RELOCoverall)を無効化することが可能となる。よって、移動局200では、隣接基地局100-2から新規セルへのハンドオーバが可能となる。これにより、例えば、移動局200は通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマが満了することで新規セルへハンドオーバすることができなくなる事態を回避し、通信の継続性を確保することが可能となる。 In the second embodiment, base station 100-1 that performs cell division notifies configuration change notification to neighboring base station 100-2. The configuration change notification includes, for example, three parameters “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. As a result, for example, the adjacent base station 100-2 can grasp that the cell division is performed in the base station 100-1, and a normal handover completion waiting timer (for example, T RELOCprep in LTE in the case of performing handover to a new cell ). And TX2 RELO Coverall ) can be invalidated. Therefore, the mobile station 200 can perform handover from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell. As a result, for example, the mobile station 200 can avoid a situation in which the normal handover completion waiting timer expires and cannot be handed over to a new cell, thereby ensuring continuity of communication.

 図20及び図21は、移動局200が隣接基地局100-2から新規セルへハンドオーバする場合のシーケンス例を表す図である。図20及び図21で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。 20 and 21 are diagrams showing a sequence example when the mobile station 200 is handed over from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell. Each process illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 基地局100-1は、新規セル#2のアンテナ構成を決定すると(S123)、セル#2に隣接するセルの有無を判定する(S170)。例えば、基地局100-1のセル制御部106は、内部メモリなどに記憶された各基地局100-1,100-2の位置情報などに基づいて、基地局100-1配下のセル#2に隣接するセルの有無を判定してもよい。 When the base station 100-1 determines the antenna configuration of the new cell # 2 (S123), the base station 100-1 determines whether there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2 (S170). For example, the cell control unit 106 of the base station 100-1 assigns the cell # 2 under the base station 100-1 to the cell # 2 under the base station 100-1 based on the location information of the base stations 100-1 and 100-2 stored in the internal memory. You may determine the presence or absence of an adjacent cell.

 基地局100-1は、セル#2に隣接するセルがあると判定したとき(S170でYes)、隣接するセル(図20の例では隣接基地局100-2)へ構成変更通知を送信する(S171)。構成変更通知には「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」を含む。例えば、セル制御部106はセル#2に隣接するセルがあると判定したときに3つのパラメータを含む構成変更通知を生成し、生成した構成変更通知をTCP/IP送受信部110を介して隣接基地局100-2へ送信する。一方、隣接基地局100-2のTCP/IP送受信部110は、例えば、基地局100-1から構成変更通知を受信すると、当該通知に含まれる3つのパラメータを抽出し、セル制御部106へ出力する。 When the base station 100-1 determines that there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2 (Yes in S170), the base station 100-1 transmits a configuration change notification to the adjacent cell (the adjacent base station 100-2 in the example of FIG. 20) ( S171). The configuration change notification includes “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. For example, when the cell control unit 106 determines that there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2, the cell control unit 106 generates a configuration change notification including three parameters, and transmits the generated configuration change notification to the adjacent base via the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110. Transmit to station 100-2. On the other hand, when the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 of the adjacent base station 100-2 receives a configuration change notification from the base station 100-1, for example, it extracts three parameters included in the notification and outputs them to the cell control unit 106. To do.

 構成変更通知を受信した隣接基地局100-2は、基地局100-1において設定されたハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(例えば、LTEではTRELOCprepとTX2RELOCoverall)を無効化する。また、隣接基地局100-2は、分割された新規セルへハンドオーバする移動局200-1,200-2に対して「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」を送信する(S172)。例えば、隣接基地局100-2のセル制御部106は3つのパラメータを生成し、制御信号処理部105により3つのパラメータを含む制御信号が生成される。当該制御信号はハンドオーバ開始指示として移動局200-1,200-2へ送信される。 The adjacent base station 100-2 that has received the configuration change notification invalidates the handover completion waiting timer (for example, T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall in LTE) set in the base station 100-1. Also, the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode” to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 that are handed over to the divided new cell. (S172). For example, the cell control unit 106 of the adjacent base station 100-2 generates three parameters, and the control signal processing unit 105 generates a control signal including the three parameters. The control signal is transmitted to mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 as a handover start instruction.

 なお、隣接基地局100-2では、構成変更受信したときから「Wait Time」で示された時間までの経過時間を監視する。 The adjacent base station 100-2 monitors the elapsed time from when the configuration change is received until the time indicated by “Wait Time”.

 次に、移動局200-1はMeasurement Reportを送信し(S174)、隣接基地局100-2は移動局200-1に対して、3つのパラメータを含むハンドオーバ開始指示を送信する(図21のS175)。ハンドオーバ開始指示には分割後の新規セル#2のセルIDも含まれる。 Next, the mobile station 200-1 transmits a Measurement Report (S174), and the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover start instruction including three parameters to the mobile station 200-1 (S175 in FIG. 21). ). The handover start instruction includes the cell ID of the new cell # 2 after the division.

 次に、隣接基地局100-2はハンドオーバ要求を基地局100-1(又はセル#1)へ送信し(S176)、基地局100-1はハンドオーバ要求を承認してハンドオーバ要求承認を隣接基地局100-2へ送信する(S177)。 Next, the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover request to the base station 100-1 (or cell # 1) (S176). The base station 100-1 approves the handover request and grants the handover request approval to the adjacent base station. Transmit to 100-2 (S177).

 隣接基地局100-2は、基地局100-1からハンドオーバ要求承認を受信すると、3つのパラメータを省略して通常のハンドオーバを実施する(S178)。例えば、隣接基地局100-2では構成変更通知を受領したときから「Wait Time」で示された時間までの経過時間を監視している。隣接基地局100-2は、「Wait Time」で示された時間までの残り時間と通常時に使用されるハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマとを比較し、当該残り時間が当該ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマより長い間は当該残り時間を監視タイマとして用いる。しかし、隣接基地局100-2は当該ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマの方が当該残り時間より長くなった時点で当該ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマを監視タイマとして用いる。すなわち、隣接基地局100-2では、当該残り時間の方と当該ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマとを比較して長い方を監視タイマとして用いる。これにより、例えば、移動局200-1の新規セル#2へのハンドオーバ時間が保証され、通信の継続性を確保できる。図21の例では、通常時に使用されるハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマの方が「Wait Time」で示される時間よりも長いため、隣接基地局100-2では当該ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマを監視タイマとして使用し、3つのパラメータを省略している(S178)。例えば、隣接基地局100-2のセル制御部106は、内部メモリなどに保持したハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマと「Wait Time」の残り時間を比較して行われてもよい。判別するタイミングとしては、例えば、S175からS177までの間であってもよい。 When the neighboring base station 100-2 receives the handover request approval from the base station 100-1, the neighboring base station 100-2 omits the three parameters and performs a normal handover (S178). For example, the adjacent base station 100-2 monitors the elapsed time from when the configuration change notification is received to the time indicated by “Wait Time”. The adjacent base station 100-2 compares the remaining time up to the time indicated by “Wait Time” with the handover completion waiting timer that is normally used, and if the remaining time is longer than the handover completion waiting timer, The remaining time is used as a monitoring timer. However, the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer when the handover completion waiting timer becomes longer than the remaining time. That is, the adjacent base station 100-2 compares the remaining time with the handover completion waiting timer and uses the longer one as the monitoring timer. Thereby, for example, the handover time of the mobile station 200-1 to the new cell # 2 is guaranteed, and the continuity of communication can be ensured. In the example of FIG. 21, since the handover completion waiting timer used at normal time is longer than the time indicated by “Wait Time”, the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer. Three parameters are omitted (S178). For example, the cell control unit 106 of the adjacent base station 100-2 may perform the handover completion waiting timer stored in the internal memory or the like and the remaining time of “Wait Time”. The determination timing may be, for example, between S175 and S177.

 次に、隣接基地局100-2は移動局200-2からMeasuremet Reportを受信し(S179)、新規セル#2へのハンドオーバ開始指示を送信する(S180)。通常のハンドオーバ処理のため、隣接基地局100-2では上述した3つの新規パラメータを送信することなく、セル#2のセルIDなどの通常のパラメータを移動局200-2へ送信する。 Next, the adjacent base station 100-2 receives the Measurement Report from the mobile station 200-2 (S179), and transmits a handover start instruction to the new cell # 2 (S180). For normal handover processing, the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits normal parameters such as the cell ID of the cell # 2 to the mobile station 200-2 without transmitting the above three new parameters.

 次に、隣接基地局100-2は、移動局200-2に対するハンドオーバ要求を基地局100-1へ送信し(S181)、基地局100-1からハンドオーバ要求承認を受ける。 Next, the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover request for the mobile station 200-2 to the base station 100-1 (S181), and receives a handover request approval from the base station 100-1.

 以降は、移動局200-1,200-2は新規セル#2に対して同期確立処理などを行う(S183~S186)。この場合、移動局200-1は「Sync Mode」で示されたモード(非競合モード又は競合モード)で同期処理を行う。 Thereafter, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform synchronization establishment processing for the new cell # 2 (S183 to S186). In this case, the mobile station 200-1 performs a synchronization process in a mode (non-contention mode or contention mode) indicated by “Sync Mode”.

 <3.セル統合時の処理>
 上述したように、保守システム300又は基地局100は、トラフィック情報に基づいて輻輳状態から通常状態への状態遷移を検出するとセルの統合を決定する。また、保守システム300又は基地局100では、セルの統合により消滅するセルに在圏する移動局200に対してハンドオーバの実行も指示する。
<3. Processing during cell integration>
As described above, when the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 detects a state transition from the congestion state to the normal state based on the traffic information, the maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 determines cell integration. The maintenance system 300 or the base station 100 also instructs the mobile station 200 located in the cell that disappears due to cell integration to execute handover.

 この際、基地局100は、セル分割時の処理と同様に、セル統合に要する処理時間を判別し、処理時間に基づいて統合後の基地局100と移動局200間の同期処理を基地局主導で行うか又は移動局主導で行うかを決定する。例えば、基地局100は、セル分割に要する処理時間が基準値以上のとき、基地局主導で同期処理を行うことを決定する。一方、例えば、セル分割に要する処理時間が基準値未満のとき、基地局100は移動局主導で同期処理を行うことを決定する。 At this time, the base station 100 determines the processing time required for cell integration, similarly to the processing at the time of cell division, and performs synchronization processing between the integrated base station 100 and the mobile station 200 based on the processing time. It is decided whether to carry out by the mobile station or by the mobile station. For example, when the processing time required for cell division is equal to or greater than a reference value, the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the base station. On the other hand, for example, when the processing time required for cell division is less than the reference value, the base station 100 determines to perform synchronization processing led by the mobile station.

 以下では、セル統合に際して、基地局主導(非競合モード)で同期処理が行われる場合と移動局主導(競合モード)で同期処理が行われる場合に分けて、同期処理を含むハンドオーバシーケンスの例を説明する。 In the following, an example of a handover sequence including synchronization processing is divided into a case where synchronization processing is performed under the initiative of the base station (non-contention mode) and a case where synchronization processing is performed under the initiative of the mobile station (contention mode). explain.

 <3.1 基地局主導(非競合モード)の同期処理>
  <3.1.1 セル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンス(非競合モード)>
 図22は、セル統合に際して非競合モード(基地局主導)により同期処理が行われる場合のハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表す。また、図22はセル統合の決定は基地局100で行われる場合の例である。図22で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。
<3.1 Synchronization process initiated by base station (non-competing mode)>
<3.1.1 Handover sequence by cell integration (non-contention mode)>
FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a handover sequence when synchronization processing is performed in the non-contention mode (base station initiative) during cell integration. FIG. 22 shows an example in which the cell integration decision is made by the base station 100. Each process illustrated in FIG. 22 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 図22では、セル統合により、基地局100-1における2つのセル#1,セル#2が1つのセル#1に統合される例を表し、移動局200-1,200-2はセル#2に在圏していたがセル統合によりセル#2が消滅し、セル#1へハンドオーバする場合の例を表している。 FIG. 22 shows an example in which two cells # 1 and # 2 in the base station 100-1 are integrated into one cell # 1 by cell integration, and the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are connected to the cell # 2. However, cell # 2 disappears due to cell integration and handover to cell # 1 is performed.

 基地局100-1は、トラフィック情報に基づいてセルを統合するか否かを判別し(S190)、セルを統合することを決定する(S190でYes)。この際、基地局100-1は、セル統合に要する処理時間が基準値より長いと判別して基地局主導(非競合モード)による同期処理を行うことも決定する。そして、基地局100-1は、保守システム300またはアクセスゲートウェイ400を介して位置情報サーバ500から移動局200-1,200-2の位置情報を取得し(S122)、セル統合を実行する(S191)。 The base station 100-1 determines whether or not to integrate cells based on the traffic information (S190), and determines to integrate cells (Yes in S190). At this time, the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell integration is longer than the reference value, and also determines to perform synchronization processing led by the base station (non-contention mode). Then, the base station 100-1 acquires the location information of the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 from the location information server 500 via the maintenance system 300 or the access gateway 400 (S122), and executes cell integration (S191). ).

 一方、消滅対象となるセル#2を収容する基地局100-1は在圏する移動局200-1,200-2に対してハンドオーバ開始指示を送信する(S192,S193)。このとき、基地局100-1は「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode=非競合モード」を含むハンドオーバ開始指示を送信する。 On the other hand, the base station 100-1 accommodating the cell # 2 to be deleted transmits a handover start instruction to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 that are in the area (S192, S193). At this time, the base station 100-1 transmits a handover start instruction including “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode = non-contention mode”.

 基地局100-1においてセル#2がセル#1へ統合されると、統合後のセル#1を収容する基地局100-1は同期確立指示要求を移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する(S195,S199)。そして、基地局100-1は移動局200-1,200-2との間で基地局主導による同期確立処理を行う(S196,S197,S200,S201)。移動局200-1,200-2は基地局100-1との同期を確立するとハンドオーバ完了通知を基地局100-1へ送信する(S198,S202)。 When cell # 2 is integrated into cell # 1 in base station 100-1, base station 100-1 that accommodates integrated cell # 1 transmits a synchronization establishment instruction request to mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2. (S195, S199). Then, the base station 100-1 performs synchronization establishment processing led by the base station with the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S196, S197, S200, S201). When the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 establish synchronization with the base station 100-1, they transmit a handover completion notification to the base station 100-1 (S198, S202).

 なお、セル統合処理が基地局100-1側で失敗した場合、移動局200-1,200-1では同期確立指示要求を受信しないことにより、基地局100-1においてセル統合処理が失敗したことを検知することが可能となる。セル統合に伴うハンドオーバが失敗したとき、統合前の元セル(図22の例ではセル#2)が残ることになるため、移動局200-1,200-2は元セルへのロールバックを行うことが可能となる。 If the cell integration process fails on the base station 100-1 side, the mobile station 200-1 or 200-1 does not receive the synchronization establishment instruction request, so that the cell integration process has failed in the base station 100-1. Can be detected. When handover associated with cell integration fails, the original cell before integration (cell # 2 in the example of FIG. 22) remains, so the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 roll back to the original cell. It becomes possible.

 ただし、移動局200-1,200-2は、セル分割処理の場合と同様に、隣接する基地局100-2配下のセルの受信強度を最上位に検出した場合、該基地局100-2へハンドオーバ、若しくは再接続手順を行ってもよい。 However, as in the case of cell division processing, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2, when detecting the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 at the highest level, move to the base station 100-2. A handover or reconnection procedure may be performed.

 <3.2 移動局主導(競合モード)の同期処理>
  <3.2.1 セル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンス(競合モード)>
 次に、セル統合に際して、競合モード(移動局主導)で同期処理が行われる場合のセル統合によるハンドオーバシーケンスの例を説明する。図23はかかる場合のシーケンス例を表している。図23で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。
<3.2 Synchronization processing initiated by the mobile station (contention mode)>
<3.2.1 Handover sequence by cell integration (contention mode)>
Next, an example of a handover sequence by cell integration in the case where synchronization processing is performed in the competition mode (initiated by the mobile station) during cell integration will be described. FIG. 23 shows a sequence example in such a case. Each process illustrated in FIG. 23 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 基地局100-1では、セル統合に要する処理時間が基準値以下と判別したとき、同期処理を移動局主導(競合モード)で行わせることを決定し(S190でYes)、セル統合を実行する(S191)。この場合、基地局100-1は、「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode=競合モード」を含むハンドオーバ開始指示を移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する(S192,S193)。 When the base station 100-1 determines that the processing time required for cell integration is equal to or less than the reference value, the base station 100-1 determines that the synchronization processing is performed by the mobile station (contention mode) (Yes in S190), and executes cell integration. (S191). In this case, the base station 100-1 transmits a handover start instruction including “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode = contention mode” to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S192). , S193).

 移動局200-1,200-2では、ハンドオーバ開始指示(S192,S193)を受信後、「Wait Time」で示された期間中、同期確立指示要求の送信と当該要求に対する応答の待機を繰り返す(S210,S211)。 After receiving the handover start instruction (S192, S193), the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 repeatedly transmit a synchronization establishment instruction request and wait for a response to the request during the period indicated by “Wait Time” ( S210, S211).

 セルが統合された後(S194)、移動局200-1,200-2から送信された同期確立指示要求は基地局100-1において受信し(S196、S200)、基地局100-1は当該要求に対する応答を移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する(S197、S201)。 After the cells are integrated (S194), the synchronization establishment instruction request transmitted from the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 is received by the base station 100-1 (S196, S200), and the base station 100-1 To the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S197, S201).

 以降、移動局200-1,200-2とセル#1を収容する基地局100-1との間で同期処理が行われ、同期が確立されると移動局200-1,200-2はハンドオーバ完了通知を基地局100-1へ送信する(S198,S202)。 Thereafter, synchronization processing is performed between the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 and the base station 100-1 that accommodates the cell # 1, and when synchronization is established, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 perform handover. A completion notification is transmitted to the base station 100-1 (S198, S202).

 なお、移動局200-1,200-2は、「Wait Time」期間が満了後、同期確立指示要求に対する応答(S197,S201)を受信しないことで基地局100-1側においてセル統合処理が失敗したことを検知可能である。この場合も、統合前の元セルが残るため、移動局200-1,200-2は元セルへのロールバックが可能となる。ただし、移動局200-1,200-2は、隣接する基地局100-2配下のセルの受信強度を最上位に検出した場合、該基地局100-2(又は基地局100-2配下のセル)へハンドオーバ、若しくは再接続手順を行ってもよい。 The mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 fail to perform the cell integration process on the base station 100-1 side by not receiving a response (S197, S201) to the synchronization establishment instruction request after the “Wait Time” period expires. Can be detected. Also in this case, since the original cells before integration remain, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 can roll back to the original cells. However, when the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 detect the reception strength of the cell under the control of the adjacent base station 100-2 at the highest level, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are able to ) Or a reconnection procedure may be performed.

 <3.3 隣接基地局からの統合処理中セルへのハンドオーバ>
 セル統合を実行する基地局100-1と隣接する隣接基地局100-2では、隣接基地局100-2配下に在圏する移動局200が基地局100-1配下の統合のセルへハンドオーバする可能性がある。
<3.3 Handover from neighboring base station to integrated processing cell>
In the adjacent base station 100-2 that is adjacent to the base station 100-1 that performs cell integration, the mobile station 200 located under the adjacent base station 100-2 can be handed over to the integrated cell under the base station 100-1. There is sex.

 本第2の実施の形態では、セル分割の場合と同様に、セル統合を実行する基地局100-1は隣接基地局100-2に対して構成変更通知を通知する。構成変更通知には、3つのパラメータ「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」が含まれる。これにより、例えば、隣接基地局100-2では基地局100-1においてセル統合が実行されることを把握し、基地局100-1配下の統合後の新規セルへのハンドオーバ実行時において通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(例えば、LTEではTRELOCprepとTX2RELOCoverall)を無効化することが可能となる。よって、移動局200は隣接基地局100-2から統合後の新規セルへのハンドオーバを行うことが可能となり、通信の継続性を確保することが可能となる。 In the second embodiment, as in the case of cell division, base station 100-1 that performs cell integration notifies configuration change notification to adjacent base station 100-2. The configuration change notification includes three parameters “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. Thereby, for example, the adjacent base station 100-2 grasps that the cell integration is executed in the base station 100-1, and the normal handover is performed when the handover to the new cell after the integration under the base station 100-1 is executed. It is possible to invalidate completion waiting timers (eg, T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall in LTE). Therefore, the mobile station 200 can perform handover from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell after integration, and can ensure continuity of communication.

 図24及び図25はセル統合対象の新規セル(セル#1)へ隣接基地局100-2からハンドオーバする場合のシーケンス例を表している。図24及び図25で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307などで行われる。 FIGS. 24 and 25 show sequence examples when handover is performed from the adjacent base station 100-2 to the new cell (cell # 1) to be integrated with the cell. Each process illustrated in FIGS. 24 and 25 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination unit 307, and the like.

 基地局100-1は、位置情報取得後、セル統合により消滅するセル#2に隣接するセルの有無を判定する(S220)。基地局100-1は、セル#2に隣接するセルが有れば(S220で「隣接セルあり」)、構成変更通知を隣接基地局100-2へ送信する(S221)。一方、基地局100-1はセル#2に隣接するセルがないとき(S220で「隣接セルなし」)、構成変更通知を送信することなくセル統合を実行する(S191)。 After acquiring the location information, the base station 100-1 determines whether there is a cell adjacent to the cell # 2 that disappears due to cell integration (S220). If there is a cell adjacent to cell # 2 (“There is an adjacent cell” in S220), base station 100-1 transmits a configuration change notification to adjacent base station 100-2 (S221). On the other hand, when there is no cell adjacent to cell # 2 (“No adjacent cell” in S220), base station 100-1 performs cell integration without transmitting a configuration change notification (S191).

 基地局100-1は構成変更通知により、通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマ(例えばLTEのTRELOCprepとTX2RELOCoverall)を無効化して、「Wait Time」で示される時間で代用し、「Sync Mode」で示されるモードにより同期処理を行わせる。 Based on the configuration change notification, the base station 100-1 invalidates the normal handover completion waiting timer (for example, LTE T RELOCprep and TX2 RELOC Coverall ), substitutes the time indicated by “Wait Time”, and indicates “Sync Mode”. The synchronization process is performed according to the mode to be used.

 隣接基地局100-2では、構成変更通知を受信後、統合後のセル#1へ移動する場合、通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマを無効化し、隣接基地局100-2配下に在圏する移動局200-1へ「Cell Deployment Indicator=True」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」を指示する(S222)。隣接基地局100-2では、Measurement Reportを受信後(S223)、3つの新規パラメータを含むハンドオーバ開始指示を移動局200-1,200-2へ送信する(S224)。 When the adjacent base station 100-2 moves to the integrated cell # 1 after receiving the configuration change notification, the adjacent base station 100-2 invalidates the normal handover completion waiting timer, and the mobile station 200 located under the adjacent base station 100-2 “Cell Deployment Indicator = True”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode” are instructed to −1 (S222). After receiving the Measurement Report (S223), the adjacent base station 100-2 transmits a handover start instruction including three new parameters to the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 (S224).

 セル統合の場合も、隣接基地局100-2では、「Wait Time」の残り時間が通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマよりも長い間は、当該残り時間を監視タイマとして用いる。しかし、隣接基地局100-2は、通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマの方が当該残り時間より長くなった時点で通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマを監視タイマとして使用する。図25の例では、後者の例を表しており、隣接基地局100-2は通常のハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマを監視タイマとして使用している。そのため、隣接基地局100-2は通常のハンドオーバを実施する(図25のS227~S229)。 Also in the case of cell integration, the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the remaining time as a monitoring timer while the remaining time of “Wait Time” is longer than the normal handover completion waiting timer. However, the adjacent base station 100-2 uses the normal handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer when the normal handover completion waiting timer becomes longer than the remaining time. In the example of FIG. 25, the latter example is shown, and the adjacent base station 100-2 uses a normal handover completion waiting timer as a monitoring timer. Therefore, the adjacent base station 100-2 performs normal handover (S227 to S229 in FIG. 25).

 また、セル統合後は、基地局100-1は移動局200-1との間で「Sync Mode」で指定されたモードで同期処理を行い、移動局200-2との間で競合モードにより通常の同期処理を行う(S332~S335)。 In addition, after cell integration, the base station 100-1 performs synchronization processing with the mobile station 200-1 in the mode specified by “Sync Mode”, and is normally in competition mode with the mobile station 200-2. Are synchronized (S332 to S335).

 <4.LTEに適用した場合の動作例>
 次に、上述した移動通信システム10についてLTEに適用した場合の動作例を説明する。
<4. Example of operation when applied to LTE>
Next, an operation example when the mobile communication system 10 described above is applied to LTE will be described.

 図26は移動通信システム10の構成例を表している。移動通信システム10は、eNB(evolved Node B)100、UE(User Equipment)200-1~200-3、EMS/NMS300、E-SMLC(Evolved Serving Mobile Location Centre)560を備える。図2に示す移動通信システム10との関係では、例えば、eNB100が基地局100-1,100-2、移動局200-1,200-2がUE200-1~200-3、位置情報サーバ500がE-SMLC560にそれぞれ対応する。なお、図26においてUE200-1は位置情報を取得できなかったUEとして表されている。 FIG. 26 shows a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10. The mobile communication system 10 includes an eNB (evolved Node B) 100, UEs (User Equipment) 200-1 to 200-3, EMS / NMS 300, and E-SMLC (Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center) 560. In the relationship with the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG. 2, for example, the eNB 100 is the base stations 100-1 and 100-2, the mobile stations 200-1 and 200-2 are UEs 200-1 to 200-3, and the location information server 500 is Each corresponds to E-SMLC560. In FIG. 26, UE 200-1 is represented as a UE that could not acquire location information.

 最初に、セル分割及び統合判断シーケンスの動作例について、eNB主導で行う場合(例えば図27)と、EMS/NMS主導で行う場合(例えば図28)に分けて説明する。また、セル分割及び統合判断シーケンスの動作例についてMME(Mobility Management Entity)主導で行う場合(例えば図30)も説明する。次に、セル分割処理シーケンス(例えば図32)、セル統合処理シーケンス(例えば図34)、隣接eNBからのハンドオーバ(例えば図36及び図37)の各動作例について説明する。最後にセル分割及び統合処理失敗が失敗した場合(例えば図38)の動作例について説明する。 First, the operation example of the cell division and integration determination sequence will be described separately for a case where it is led by eNB (for example, FIG. 27) and a case where it is led by EMS / NMS (for example, FIG. 28). In addition, a case where the operation example of the cell division and integration determination sequence is led by MME (Mobility Management Entity) (for example, FIG. 30) will be described. Next, operation examples of a cell division processing sequence (for example, FIG. 32), a cell integration processing sequence (for example, FIG. 34), and a handover from a neighboring eNB (for example, FIGS. 36 and 37) will be described. Finally, an operation example when cell division and integration processing failure has failed (for example, FIG. 38) will be described.

 なお、UE200-1~200-3については、とくに断らない限りUE200として説明する場合がある。 Note that the UEs 200-1 to 200-3 may be described as the UE 200 unless otherwise specified.

 <4.1.eNBによるセル分割及び統合判断>
 図27は、eNB主導でセル分割及び統合を判断する場合のシーケンス例を表している。図27で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307,407などで行われる。
<4.1. Cell division and integration judgment by eNB>
FIG. 27 illustrates a sequence example in the case of determining cell division and integration led by an eNB. Each process illustrated in FIG. 27 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination units 307 and 407, and the like.

 eNB100は各UE200-1~200-3のトラフィック負荷を随時確認しており、トラフィック負荷(又はトラフィック情報。以下では、「トラフィック負荷」と称する場合がある)と閾値(例えば輻輳状態閾値と通常状態閾値)を比較する(S350)。eNB100は、トラフィック負荷と閾値の関係の変化を確認し(S351)、トラフィック負荷が閾値以上になるとS352以降の処理を行い、トラフィック負荷が閾値未満になるとS361の処理を行う。 The eNB 100 confirms the traffic load of each of the UEs 200-1 to 200-3 as needed, and the traffic load (or traffic information. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “traffic load”) and a threshold (for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state) (Threshold) are compared (S350). The eNB 100 confirms a change in the relationship between the traffic load and the threshold (S351), and performs the processing from S352 onward when the traffic load exceeds the threshold, and performs the processing in S361 when the traffic load falls below the threshold.

 トラフィック負荷が閾値以上になると、eNB100は、eNB100と接続している全UE200の位置情報をEMS/NMS300へ要求する(S352)。この場合、eNB100はeNB100に接続する全UE200の識別情報を取得要求に含めてもよい。位置情報の取得要求は、EMS/NMS300を経由してE-SMLC560へ送信され(S353)、E-SMLC560はEMS/NMS300へ位置情報を返却する(S354)。 When the traffic load is equal to or greater than the threshold, the eNB 100 requests location information of all UEs 200 connected to the eNB 100 from the EMS / NMS 300 (S352). In this case, the eNB 100 may include identification information of all UEs 200 connected to the eNB 100 in the acquisition request. The location information acquisition request is transmitted to the E-SMLC 560 via the EMS / NMS 300 (S353), and the E-SMLC 560 returns the location information to the EMS / NMS 300 (S354).

 EMS/NMS300は、位置情報をE-SMLC560から受信すると(S354)、全UE200の位置情報がE-SMLC560から受信した位置情報に含まれているか否かを確認し、全UE200の位置情報が存在すればS355の処理へ移行する。一方、EMS/NMS300は、E-SMLC560から受信した位置情報には全UE200の位置情報が含まれていないときはS356の処理へ移行する。例えば、EMS/NMS300の判定部307はeNB100から受信した全UEの識別情報がE-SMLC560から取得した位置情報に含まれていれば全UE200の位置情報が含まれていると判別する。一方、判定部307は全UE200の識別情報がE-SMLC560から取得した位置情報に含まれていないときは全UE200の位置情報が含まれていないと判別する。 When the EMS / NMS 300 receives location information from the E-SMLC 560 (S354), the EMS / NMS 300 checks whether the location information of all UEs 200 is included in the location information received from the E-SMLC 560, and the location information of all UEs 200 exists. Then, the process proceeds to S355. On the other hand, when the location information received from the E-SMLC 560 does not include the location information of all UEs 200, the EMS / NMS 300 proceeds to the process of S356. For example, the determination unit 307 of the EMS / NMS 300 determines that the location information of all UEs 200 is included if the identification information of all UEs received from the eNB 100 is included in the location information acquired from the E-SMLC 560. On the other hand, when the identification information of all UEs 200 is not included in the position information acquired from E-SMLC 560, determination unit 307 determines that the position information of all UEs 200 is not included.

 全UE200の位置情報が存在するときは、EMS/NMS300はE-SMLC560から受信した全UE200の位置情報をeNB100へ返却する(S355)。 When the location information of all UEs 200 exists, the EMS / NMS 300 returns the location information of all UEs 200 received from the E-SMLC 560 to the eNB 100 (S355).

 一方、全UE200の位置情報が存在しないときは、EMS/NMS300はE-SMLC560から受信した位置情報をeNB100へ返却し、位置情報が存在しないUE200-1に対して3点測量に用いる無線品質情報の測定指示をeNB100へ送信する(S356)。 On the other hand, when there is no location information of all the UEs 200, the EMS / NMS 300 returns the location information received from the E-SMLC 560 to the eNB 100, and the radio quality information used for the three-point survey for the UE 200-1 without the location information. Is transmitted to the eNB 100 (S356).

 eNB100は、当該測定指示を受けて、UE200-1に対して無線品質測定及び送信指示を送信し(S357)、UE200-1はMeasurement ReportをeNB100へ送信する(S358)。例えば、eNB100ではセル制御部106により当該指示が送信され、UE200-1ではハンドオーバ制御部206により無線品質の測定が行われる。 The eNB 100 receives the measurement instruction, transmits a radio quality measurement and transmission instruction to the UE 200-1 (S357), and the UE 200-1 transmits a Measurement Report to the eNB 100 (S358). For example, the eNB 100 transmits the instruction by the cell control unit 106, and the UE 200-1 measures the radio quality by the handover control unit 206.

 eNB100はMeasurement Reportを受信して、3点測量法によりUE200-1の位置情報を決定する(S359)。例えば、セル制御部106(又は移動局位置情報管理部109)により位置情報を決定してもよい。 The eNB 100 receives the Measurement Report and determines the location information of the UE 200-1 by the three-point survey method (S359). For example, the location information may be determined by the cell control unit 106 (or the mobile station location information management unit 109).

 eNB100は、S355により全UE200の位置情報を受信した場合、又は、S355とS359により全UE200の位置情報を取得した場合、全UE200の位置情報に基づいて、セル分割によるアンテナ構成を算出する(S360)。そして、eNB100では、分割後の新規セルへハンドオーバさせる対象となるUE200を決定する(S362)。ハンドオーバ対象のUE200は、例えば、セル分割前後で異なるセルに接続させるUEである。 When the eNB 100 receives the location information of all the UEs 200 in S355 or acquires the location information of all the UEs 200 in S355 and S359, the eNB 100 calculates the antenna configuration by cell division based on the location information of all the UEs 200 (S360). ). And in eNB100, UE200 used as the object made to hand over to the new cell after a division is determined (S362). The handover target UE 200 is, for example, a UE that is connected to different cells before and after cell division.

 一方、eNB100は、トラフィック負荷が閾値未満になると(S351)、セル統合によるアンテナ構成を算出し(S361)、ハンドオーバ対象のUE200を決定する(S362)。ハンドオーバ対象のUE200は、例えば、セル統合前後で異なるセルに接続させるUEである。 On the other hand, when the traffic load becomes less than the threshold (S351), the eNB 100 calculates an antenna configuration by cell integration (S361), and determines a handover target UE 200 (S362). The handover target UE 200 is, for example, a UE that is connected to different cells before and after cell integration.

 <4.2 EMS/NMSによるセル分割及び統合判断>
 図28はEMS/NMS主導でセル分割及びセル統合を判断する場合のシーケンス例を表している。図28で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307,407などで行われる。
<4.2 Cell division and integration judgment by EMS / NMS>
FIG. 28 shows a sequence example in the case of determining cell division and cell integration led by EMS / NMS. Each process shown in FIG. 28 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination units 307 and 407, and the like.

 EMS/NMS300はeNB100のトラフィック負荷を随時確認し(S370,S371)、トラフィック負荷と閾値(例えば輻輳状態閾値と通常状態閾値)とを比較して(S372)、その関係が変化した場合、eNB100に接続中のUE200のUE情報をeNB100から取得する(S373,S374)。UE情報としてはUE200の識別情報などがある。 The EMS / NMS 300 confirms the traffic load of the eNB 100 as needed (S370, S371), compares the traffic load with a threshold (for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state threshold) (S372), and if the relationship changes, The UE information of the currently connected UE 200 is acquired from the eNB 100 (S373, S374). The UE information includes identification information of the UE 200.

 EMS/NMS300は、トラフィック負荷が閾値以上へ変化したときはS353以降の処理によりセル分割を行う。一方、EMS/NMS300は、トラフィック負荷が閾値未満へ変化したときはS382の処理によりセル統合を行う。 The EMS / NMS 300 performs cell division by the processing after S353 when the traffic load changes to a threshold value or more. On the other hand, when the traffic load changes below the threshold, the EMS / NMS 300 performs cell integration by the process of S382.

 トラフィック負荷が閾値以上へ変化したとき、EMS/NMS300は、全UE200の位置情報をE-SMLC560へ要求し、E-SMLC560は存在する(保持する)UE200の位置情報を返却する(S354)。 When the traffic load changes to a threshold value or more, the EMS / NMS 300 requests the location information of all UEs 200 from the E-SMLC 560, and the E-SMLC 560 returns the location information of the existing (held) UEs 200 (S354).

 EMS/NMS300は、eNB100から取得した全UE200の位置情報が、E-SMLC560から取得した位置情報に存在しないときは、3点測量による無線品質の取得指示をeNB100へ送信する(S375)。eNB100は当該取得指示を受けて位置情報が存在しないUE200-1の無線品質情報を取得し(S376,S377)、取得した位置情報をEMS/NMS300へ送信する(S378)。 The EMS / NMS 300, when the location information of all UEs 200 acquired from the eNB 100 does not exist in the location information acquired from the E-SMLC 560, transmits to the eNB 100 a radio quality acquisition instruction based on three-point surveying (S375). In response to the acquisition instruction, the eNB 100 acquires the radio quality information of the UE 200-1 having no position information (S376, S377), and transmits the acquired position information to the EMS / NMS 300 (S378).

 そして、EMS/NMS300は3点測量法にてUE200-1の位置情報を決定する(S380)。例えば、EMS/NMS300の移動局位置情報管理部306(又は判定部307)がeNB100から取得した3点の無線品質情報に基づいて位置情報を決定してもよい。 Then, the EMS / NMS 300 determines the position information of the UE 200-1 by the three-point survey method (S380). For example, the mobile station location information management unit 306 (or determination unit 307) of the EMS / NMS 300 may determine the location information based on the three points of radio quality information acquired from the eNB 100.

 次に、EMS/NMS300は全UE200の位置情報に基づいてその偏りを分析し、セル分割によるアンテナ構成を算出する(S381)。 Next, the EMS / NMS 300 analyzes the bias based on the location information of all the UEs 200, and calculates the antenna configuration by cell division (S381).

 次に、EMS/NMS300はハンドオーバ対象のUE200を決定し(S383)、アンテナ構成とハンドオーバ対象のUE200に関する情報をeNB100へ送信し、アンテナ構成とハンドオーバ対象のUE200をeNB100へ指示する(S384)。 Next, the EMS / NMS 300 determines a handover target UE 200 (S383), transmits information on the antenna configuration and the handover target UE 200 to the eNB 100, and instructs the eNB 100 of the antenna configuration and the handover target UE 200 (S384).

 一方、EMS/NMS300は、トラフィック負荷が閾値未満へ変化したときは、セル統合によるアンテナ構成を算出し(S382)、ハンドオーバ対象UE200を決定し(S383)、アンテナ構成と当該UE200をeNB100へ指示する(S384)。 On the other hand, when the traffic load changes below the threshold, the EMS / NMS 300 calculates an antenna configuration based on cell integration (S382), determines a handover target UE 200 (S383), and instructs the eNB 100 about the antenna configuration and the UE 200. (S384).

 <4.3 MMEによるセル分割及び統合判断>
 次にMMEによるセル分割及び統合を判断する場合の動作例について説明する。図29はMME450を含む移動通信システム10の構成例を表す図である。移動通信システム10は、更に、MME450とE-SMLC(Evolved Serving Mobile Location Centre)560を含む。例えば、MME450は図2に示す移動通信システム10のアクセスゲートウェイ400、E-SMLC560は位置情報サーバ500にそれぞれ対応する。
<4.3 Cell division and integration judgment by MME>
Next, an operation example in the case of determining cell division and integration by the MME will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10 including the MME 450. The mobile communication system 10 further includes an MME 450 and an E-SMLC (Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center) 560. For example, the MME 450 corresponds to the access gateway 400 and the E-SMLC 560 of the mobile communication system 10 shown in FIG.

 図30はMME450主導でセル分割及びセル統合判断を行う場合のシーケンス例を表している。図30で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106、ハンドオーバ制御部206、判定部307,407などで行われる。 FIG. 30 shows a sequence example in the case of performing cell division and cell integration determination led by MME450. Each process illustrated in FIG. 30 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106, the handover control unit 206, the determination units 307 and 407, and the like.

 eNB100は自局のトラフィック負荷を随時確認し、閾値(例えば輻輳状態閾値と通常状態閾値など)とトラフィック負荷とを比較する(S350)。そして、eNB100は、負荷状態(又は輻輳状態)又は通常状態(又は緩和状態)への状態遷移を検出すると、MME450へトラフィック状態変化通知を送信する(S390)。 The eNB 100 checks the traffic load of the local station as needed, and compares a threshold (for example, a congestion state threshold and a normal state threshold) with the traffic load (S350). And eNB100 will transmit a traffic state change notification to MME450, if the state transition to a load state (or congestion state) or a normal state (or relaxation state) is detected (S390).

 MME450は、トラフィック状態変化通知を受信すると、状態変化の内容に従ってセルの分割又はセルの統合を判断する。すなわち、MME450は輻輳状態への状態変化を検出するとセル分割を決定し、eNB100に在圏する全UE200の位置情報をE-SMLC560に対して要求する(S391)。この場合、MME450はeNB100に接続する全UE200の情報を保持しているため、eNB100に対してUE200の位置情報の取得要求を送信することはしない。 When receiving the traffic state change notification, the MME 450 determines cell division or cell integration according to the content of the state change. That is, when the MME 450 detects a state change to the congestion state, the MME 450 determines cell division and requests the E-SMLC 560 for location information of all UEs 200 located in the eNB 100 (S391). In this case, since the MME 450 holds information on all the UEs 200 connected to the eNB 100, the MME 450 does not transmit an acquisition request for the location information of the UE 200 to the eNB 100.

 MME450はE-SMLC560から受け取った位置情報に全UE200分の位置情報が存在しないとき、位置情報が存在しないUE200-1の無線品質情報の取得をeNB100へ指示する(S393)。eNB100は当該取得指示に従ってUE200-1から無線品質を取得し(S394,S395)、MME450へ送信する(S396)。 When the location information received from the E-SMLC 560 does not include location information for all UEs 200, the MME 450 instructs the eNB 100 to acquire the radio quality information of the UE 200-1 for which location information does not exist (S393). The eNB 100 acquires radio quality from the UE 200-1 according to the acquisition instruction (S394, S395), and transmits it to the MME 450 (S396).

 MME450は、eNB100から無線品質情報を受け取ると(S394~S396)、無線品質情報について3点測量法を用いてUE200-1の位置を決定する。そして、MME450は、全UE200の位置情報に基づいてUEの偏りを分析し、セル分割によりセル容量を最大化させるアンテナ構成を決定する(S397)。 When the MME 450 receives the radio quality information from the eNB 100 (S394 to S396), the MME 450 determines the position of the UE 200-1 using the three-point surveying method for the radio quality information. Then, the MME 450 analyzes the UE bias based on the location information of all the UEs 200, and determines an antenna configuration that maximizes the cell capacity by cell division (S397).

 次に、MME450はセル分割によりハンドオーバ対象となるUE200を決定し(S399)、eNB100へ通知する(S400)。 Next, the MME 450 determines the UE 200 to be handed over by cell division (S399) and notifies the eNB 100 (S400).

 一方、MME450は、通常状態への状態遷移を検出するとセル統合を決定してアンテナ構成を算出し(S398)、セル統合後に移動を要するUE200を決定し(S399)、eNB100へ通知する(S400)。 On the other hand, when detecting a state transition to the normal state, the MME 450 determines cell integration and calculates an antenna configuration (S398), determines a UE 200 that needs to move after cell integration (S399), and notifies the eNB 100 (S400). .

 <4.4 セル分割処理シーケンス>
 次に、セル分割の動作例について説明する。図31は移動通信システム10の構成例を表している。図31の例は、UE200が在圏するセルはセル分割により、セルIDが「Cell#1」から「Cell#2」へと変更される場合の例を表している。
<4.4 Cell Division Processing Sequence>
Next, an example of cell division operation will be described. FIG. 31 illustrates a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10. The example of FIG. 31 represents an example in which the cell ID of the cell in which the UE 200 is located is changed from “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 2” due to cell division.

 図32はセル分割処理のシーケンス例を表している。図32で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106やハンドオーバ制御部206などで行われる。 FIG. 32 shows a sequence example of cell division processing. Each process illustrated in FIG. 32 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106 and the handover control unit 206.

 eNB100は、新規セルに接続するUE200に対してRRC Conncetion Reconfigurationを送信する(S410)。RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationは、例えば、eNB100がUE200に対してRRCコネクションを確立させて新規セルへ接続することを指示していることを表している。 ENB100 transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration with respect to UE200 connected to a new cell (S410). The RRC Connection Reconfiguration indicates that, for example, the eNB 100 instructs the UE 200 to establish an RRC connection and connect to a new cell.

 本第2の実施の形態では、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationには、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」の3つのパラメータが含まれる。また、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationには、その他のパラメータとして「New Cell ID」(又は「New C-ID」)、「Band」、「Frequency」が含まれる。  In the second embodiment, the RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. In addition, the RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes “New Cell ID” (or “New C-ID”), “Band”, and “Frequency” as other parameters. *

 なお、図32の例では、「Sync Mode=Non-Contention(非競合モード)」となっている。 In the example of FIG. 32, “Sync Mode = Non-Contention (non-contention mode)”.

 UE200は、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationを受信すると、「New Cell ID」で指定されたセル(「Cell#2」)との同期処理を待ち合わせる。すなわち、UE200は、Cell#2を収容するeNB100からのRA Premable Assignmentの受信を「Wait Time」で指定された期間、待ち合わせる(S412)。 Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200 waits for a synchronization process with the cell (“Cell # 2”) specified by the “New Cell ID”. That is, the UE 200 waits for the reception of RA Preamble Assignment from the eNB 100 that accommodates Cell # 2 for a period specified by “Wait Time” (S412).

 一方、eNB100は、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationを送信後、各アンテナ101に対してビームフォーミングなどによって、セルの分割を実行する(S411)。eNB100は、新規セル(「Cell#2」)に接続するUE200に対して、RA Preamble Assignmentを送信する(S413)。 On the other hand, after transmitting the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the eNB 100 performs cell division by beam forming or the like for each antenna 101 (S411). The eNB 100 transmits the RA Preamble Assignment to the UE 200 connected to the new cell (“Cell # 2”) (S413).

 RA Preamble Assignmentを受信したUE200は、RA Preamble Assignmentにより指示されたRA PreambleをeNB100へ送信する(S414)。 The UE 200 that has received the RA Preamble Assignment transmits the RA Preamble instructed by the RA Preamble Assignment to the eNB 100 (S414).

 RA Preambleを受信したeNB100は、RA ResponseをUE200へ送信する(S415)。RA Responseには、例えば、タイミング調整値などが含まれる。 The eNB 100 that has received the RA Preamble transmits an RA Response to the UE 200 (S415). The RA response includes, for example, a timing adjustment value.

 RA Responseを受信したUE200は、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationの処理が完了したとの判断のもと、RRC Conncetion Reconfiguration CompleteをeNB100へ送信する(S416)。 The UE 200 that has received the RA Response transmits the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to the eNB 100 based on the determination that the RRC Connection Reconfiguration processing has been completed (S416).

 このような処理により、ビームフォーミングによる新規セルが展開されるときにおいても、UE200の移動タイミングの調整が可能となる。 By such a process, it is possible to adjust the movement timing of the UE 200 even when a new cell is deployed by beam forming.

 <4.5 セル統合処理シーケンス>
 次に、セル統合処理について説明する。図33は移動通信システム10の構成例を表す。図33は、セル統合により「Cell#2」が消滅し、「Cell#2」に在圏するUE200が「Cell#1」へハンドオーバする例を表している。
<4.5 Cell integration processing sequence>
Next, the cell integration process will be described. FIG. 33 shows a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10. FIG. 33 illustrates an example in which “Cell # 2” disappears due to cell integration, and UE 200 located in “Cell # 2” hands over to “Cell # 1”.

 図34はセル統合処理のシーケンス例を表している。図34で示される各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106やハンドオーバ制御部206などで行われる。 FIG. 34 shows a sequence example of cell integration processing. Each process illustrated in FIG. 34 is performed by, for example, the cell control unit 106 and the handover control unit 206.

 eNB100は、「Cell#2」に接続するUE200に対して、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationを送信する(S420)。RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationには、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」の3つのパラメータが含まれる。図34の例では、「Sync Mode=Contention(競合モード)」となっている。 ENB 100 transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE 200 connected to “Cell # 2” (S420). The RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. In the example of FIG. 34, “Sync Mode = Contention (competition mode)”.

 RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationを受信したUE200は、「New Cell ID」で指定されたセル(「Cell#1」)に対してRA Preambleを送信し、RA Responseの受信を待機する(S422,S423)。「Wait Time」で指定された期間、UE200はこの送信と待機を繰り返す。 The UE 200 that has received the RRC Connection Reconfiguration transmits an RA Preamble to the cell (“Cell # 1”) specified by the “New Cell ID”, and waits for the reception of the RA Response (S422, S423). The UE 200 repeats this transmission and standby for the period specified by “Wait Time”.

 eNB100は、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationを送信後、ビームフォーミングなどによりセルの統合を実行する(S421)。セル統合後、eNB100はUE200から送信されたRA Preambleを受信し(S424)、RA ResponseをUE200へ送信する(S425)。 ENB100 performs cell integration by beam forming etc. after transmitting RRC Connection Reconfiguration (S421). After cell integration, the eNB 100 receives the RA preamble transmitted from the UE 200 (S424), and transmits an RA response to the UE 200 (S425).

 RA Responseを受信したUE200は、RRC Conncetion Reconfigurationの処理が完了したとの判断のもと、RRC Conncetion Reconfiguration CompleteをeNB100へ送信する(S426)。 The UE 200 that has received the RA Response transmits the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to the eNB 100 based on the determination that the RRC Connection Reconfiguration processing has been completed (S426).

 以上の処理によって、ビームフォーミングによるセル統合の際にも、UE200の移動タイミングを調整することが可能となる。 Through the above processing, it is possible to adjust the movement timing of the UE 200 even during cell integration by beamforming.

 <4.6 隣接eNBからのハンドオーバ>
 次に、隣接eNBから、セル分割又は統合処理を実行しているeNBへハンドオーバが行われる場合の動作例について説明する。
<4.6 Handover from neighboring eNB>
Next, an operation example in the case where handover is performed from an adjacent eNB to an eNB that is performing cell division or integration processing will be described.

 図35は移動通信システム10の構成例を表している。図35の例では、eNB100-1においてセル分割により、セルIDが「Cell#1」が「Cell#2」へと変更される。また、図35は、2つのUE200-1,200-2が隣接eNB100-2から「Cell#2」へハンドオーバする例が示されている。 FIG. 35 shows a configuration example of the mobile communication system 10. In the example of FIG. 35, the cell ID is changed from “Cell # 1” to “Cell # 2” by cell division in the eNB 100-1. FIG. 35 illustrates an example in which two UEs 200-1 and 200-2 are handed over from the neighboring eNB 100-2 to “Cell # 2.”

 図36は隣接eNB100-2からのハンドオーバシーケンスの例を表している。図36で示される各処理は、例えば、隣接eNB100-2やセル分割を実施するeNB100-1のセル制御部106やハンドオーバ制御部206などで行われる。 FIG. 36 shows an example of a handover sequence from the neighboring eNB 100-2. Each process illustrated in FIG. 36 is performed by, for example, the neighboring eNB 100-2, the cell control unit 106 of the eNB 100-1 that performs cell division, the handover control unit 206, or the like.

 eNB100-1は、セル分割を実行する際に周辺の隣接eNBを調査し、セル分割後の新規セルと隣接するセルを判別する。そして、eNB100-1は、新規セルと隣接するセルを収容する隣接eNB100-2へeNB Configuration Updateを送信する(S430)。eNB Configuration Updateは、例えば、上述した構成変更通知(例えば図20のS171など)に対応する。eNB Configuration Updateには、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」の2つのパラメータが含まれる。「Sync Mode」は隣接eNB100-2で判断してもよく、eNB Configuration Updateに「Sync Mode」が含まれてもよいし含まれてなくてもよい。 The eNB 100-1 investigates neighboring neighboring eNBs when performing cell division, and discriminates the neighboring cells from the new cell after cell division. Then, the eNB 100-1 transmits the eNB Configuration Update to the adjacent eNB 100-2 that accommodates the cell adjacent to the new cell (S430). eNB Configuration Update corresponds to, for example, the above-described configuration change notification (for example, S171 in FIG. 20). The eNB Configuration Update includes two parameters, “Cell Deployment Indicator” and “Wait Time”. “Sync Mode” may be determined by the neighboring eNB 100-2, and “Sync Mode” may or may not be included in the eNB Configuration Update.

 隣接eNB100-2は、eNB Configuration Updateを受信すると、「Wait Time」で指定された時間のタイマ(又はカウント)を開始する(S431)。 When the adjacent eNB 100-2 receives the eNB Configuration Update, the adjacent eNB 100-2 starts a timer (or count) for the time specified by “Wait Time” (S431).

 隣接eNB100-2では、「Wait Time」で指定されたタイマの残り時間がハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマTRELOCprep+TX2RELOCoverall以上のとき、隣接eNB100-2に接続中のUE200-1がハンドオーバ対象になったとする(S432)。この場合、隣接eNB100-2は「Wait Time」で指定されたタイマを監視タイマとして用いる。隣接eNB100-2は、セル分割処理中のeNB100-1に対してHandover Requestを送信する(S433)。 In the adjacent eNB 100-2, when the remaining time of the timer specified by “Wait Time” is equal to or longer than the handover completion waiting timer T RELOCprep + TX2 RELO Coverall, the UE 200-1 connected to the adjacent eNB 100-2 becomes a handover target ( S432). In this case, the adjacent eNB 100-2 uses the timer specified by “Wait Time” as the monitoring timer. The adjacent eNB 100-2 transmits a Handover Request to the eNB 100-1 that is performing the cell division process (S433).

 eNB100-1は、Handover Requestを受信すると、Handover Request Acknowledgementを隣接eNB100-2へ送信する(S434)。 When the eNB 100-1 receives the Handover Request, the eNB 100-1 transmits a Handover Request Acknowledgment to the adjacent eNB 100-2 (S434).

 隣接eNB100-2は、Handover Request Acknowledgementを受信すると、RRC Connection ReconfigurationをUE200-1へ送信する(S435)。RRC Connection Reconfigurationには、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」の3つの新規パラメータが含まれる。このうち、「Cell Deployment Indicator」と「Wait Time」はeNB Configuration Update(S430)に含まれ、「Sync Mode」は隣接eNB100-2が決定したものでもよい。又は、3つの新規パラメータ全てeNB Configuration Update(S430)に含まれたものをそのまま隣接eNB100-2で用いてもよい。 When the neighboring eNB 100-2 receives the Handover Request Acknowledgment, the neighboring eNB 100-2 transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the UE 200-1 (S435). The RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three new parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. Among these, “Cell Deployment Indicator” and “Wait Time” may be included in the eNB Configuration Update (S430), and “Sync Mode” may be determined by the neighboring eNB 100-2. Alternatively, all the three new parameters included in the eNB Configuration Update (S430) may be used as they are in the adjacent eNB 100-2.

 図36の例では、「Sync Mode=Non-Contention(非競合モード)」となっている。その他のパラメータとして、分割後のセルのセルID(「Cell#2」)などが含まれる。 In the example of FIG. 36, “Sync Mode = Non-Contention (non-competing mode)” is set. Other parameters include the cell ID of the cell after division (“Cell # 2”) and the like.

 UE200-1は、RRC Connection Reconfigurationを受信すると、「Wait Time」で指定された期間、RA Preamble Assignmentの受信を待ち合わせる(S436)。 Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200-1 waits for the reception of the RA Preamble Assignment for the period specified by “Wait Time” (S436).

 セル分割後(S441)、UE200-1はRA Preamble Assignmentを受信すると(S442)、同期処理を行う(S442~S445)。 After cell division (S441), upon receiving the RA Preamble Assignment (S442), the UE 200-1 performs a synchronization process (S442 to S445).

 一方、隣接eNB100-2は「Wait Time」で指定された時間の残り時間がハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマTRELOCprep+TX2RELOCoverall未満のとき、隣接eNB100-2に接続中のUE200-2がハンドオーバ対象になったとする(S437)。この場合、隣接eNB100-2は、「Wait Time」より長い残り時間を有するハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマTRELOCprepとTX2RELOCoverallを監視タイマとして用いる。このとき、隣接eNB100-2は、セル分割処理中のeNB100-1に対して、Handover Requestを送信する(S438)。 On the other hand, when the remaining time of the time specified by “Wait Time” is less than the handover completion waiting timer T RELOCprep + TX2 RELO Coverall , the neighboring eNB 100-2 assumes that the UE 200-2 connected to the neighboring eNB 100-2 becomes a handover target (S437). In this case, the neighboring eNB 100-2 uses the handover completion waiting timers T RELOCprep and TX2 RELO Coverall having a remaining time longer than “Wait Time” as monitoring timers. At this time, the neighboring eNB 100-2 transmits a Handover Request to the eNB 100-1 that is performing the cell division process (S438).

 隣接eNB100-2は、eNB100-1からHandover Request Acknowledgementを受信すると(S439)、RRC Connection ReconfigurationをUE200-1へ送信する(S440)。RRC Connection Reconfigurationには、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」の3つの新規パラメータが含まれる。図36の例では「Sync Mode=Non-Contention(非競合モード)」となっている。 When the neighboring eNB 100-2 receives the Handover Request Acknowledgment from the eNB 100-1 (S439), the neighboring eNB 100-2 transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the UE 200-1 (S440). The RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three new parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. In the example of FIG. 36, “Sync Mode = Non-Contention (non-competing mode)”.

 UE200-2は、RRC Connection Reconfigurationを受信すると、ハンドオーバ完了待ちタイマT304の期間、RA Preamble Assignmentの受信を待ち合わせる。 When receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200-2 waits for the reception of the RA Preamble Assignment during the handover completion waiting timer T304.

 そして、セル分割後(S441)、UE200-1はRA Preamble Assignmentを受信すると(図37のS450)、同期処理を行う(S451~S453)。 Then, after cell division (S441), the UE 200-1 receives the RA Preamble Assignment (S450 in FIG. 37), and performs synchronization processing (S451 to S453).

 以上の処理により、隣接eNB100-2からセル分割又は統合処理を実行中のeNB100へハンドオーバが可能となる。 Through the above processing, handover from the neighboring eNB 100-2 to the eNB 100 that is executing the cell division or integration processing becomes possible.

 <4.7 セル分割又は統合処理失敗によるハンドオーバ未完了>
 最後に、セル分割又は統合処理が失敗した場合の動作例について説明する。図38はセル分割処理が失敗した場合にハンドオーバが完了しなかった場合のシーケンス例を表している。図38で示す各処理は、例えば、セル制御部106とハンドオーバ制御部206などで行われる。
<4.7 Incomplete handover due to cell division or integration failure>
Finally, an operation example when cell division or integration processing fails will be described. FIG. 38 shows a sequence example in the case where handover is not completed when the cell division process fails. Each process shown in FIG. 38 is performed by the cell control unit 106 and the handover control unit 206, for example.

 eNB100-1は新規セル(「Cell#2」)に接続するUE200-1に対して、RRC Connection Reconfigurationを送信する(S460)。RRC Connection Reconfigurationには、「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」の3つの新規パラメータが含まれる。図36の例では「Sync Mode=Non-Contention(非競合モード)」となっている。 ENB 100-1 transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE 200-1 connected to the new cell (“Cell # 2”) (S460). The RRC Connection Reconfiguration includes three new parameters: “Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”. In the example of FIG. 36, “Sync Mode = Non-Contention (non-competing mode)”.

 UE200-1は、RRC Connection Reconfigurationを受信すると、「Wait Time」で示された期間、同期処理を待ち合わせる(S461)。 Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reconfiguration, the UE 200-1 waits for the synchronization process for the period indicated by “Wait Time” (S461).

 このとき、セル分割処理を行うeNB100-1では、処理負荷などにより「Wait Time」内にRA Preamble Assignmentを送信できなかったとする。 At this time, it is assumed that the eNB 100-1 that performs the cell division processing cannot transmit the RA Preamble Assignment in the “Wait Time” due to a processing load or the like.

 この場合、UE200-1では、「Wait Time」期間中にRA Preamble Assignmentを受信することなく「Wait Time」で示された期間が満了する(S462)。 In this case, in the UE 200-1, the period indicated by “Wait Time” expires without receiving the RA Preamble Assignment during the “Wait Time” period (S462).

 この場合、UE200-1は、「Wait Time」期間中にRA Preamble Assignmentを受信しないことでeNB100-1においてセル分割が失敗したことを検知する。この場合、UE200-1は、直前に接続したeNB100-1との通信を再開(又はロールバック)する。UE200-1は、通常の再接続手順を行うことなくeNB100との通信を再開する。eNB100-1は、UE200-1との通信処理を保留しており、UE200-1からの接続再開に対して応答する(S463)。 In this case, the UE 200-1 detects that the cell division has failed in the eNB 100-1 by not receiving the RA Preamble Assignment during the “Wait Time” period. In this case, the UE 200-1 resumes (or rolls back) communication with the eNB 100-1 connected immediately before. The UE 200-1 resumes communication with the eNB 100 without performing a normal reconnection procedure. The eNB 100-1 suspends the communication process with the UE 200-1, and responds to the connection resumption from the UE 200-1 (S463).

 以上の処理により、UE200-1は「Wait Time」期間満了後、再接続手順を行うことなく「Cell#1」を収容するeNB100-1との通信を復帰することが可能となる。 Through the above processing, the UE 200-1 can return to the communication with the eNB 100-1 accommodating “Cell # 1” without performing the reconnection procedure after the “Wait Time” period expires.

 [その他の実施の形態]
 第2の実施の形態では、アンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成へ変更することでセルを分割したり、統合したりする例について説明した。例えば、基地局100ではアンテナの構成を変更することで、基地局100(又はセル)では使用する周波数(又はキャリア)f1を2つの周波数f1,f2に分割したり統合したりすることも可能である。周波数の変更により移動局200ではハンドオーバを行う場合がある。この場合でも、第2の実施の形態と同様に、保守システム300はトラフィック情報を基地局100から取得し、位置情報を位置情報サーバ500から取得し、トラフィック情報と位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成への変更を決定してもよい。その際、基地局100はハンドオーバ対象の移動局200に対して3つのパラメータ(「Cell Deployment Indicator」、「Wait Time」、「Sync Mode」)を送信する。従って、第2の実施の形態で説明した“セル”に代えて“周波数”としてもよく、移動通信システム10では第2の実施の形態で説明したことを実施可能である。よって、セル容量を適切に制御し、通信の継続性を確保することが可能となる。
[Other embodiments]
In the second embodiment, an example has been described in which cells are divided or integrated by changing the antenna configuration from the first configuration to the second configuration. For example, by changing the antenna configuration in the base station 100, the base station 100 (or cell) can divide or integrate the frequency (or carrier) f1 used into two frequencies f1 and f2. is there. The mobile station 200 may perform a handover due to a change in frequency. Even in this case, as in the second embodiment, the maintenance system 300 acquires traffic information from the base station 100, acquires position information from the position information server 500, and configures the antenna configuration based on the traffic information and position information. The change from the first configuration to the second configuration may be determined. At that time, the base station 100 transmits three parameters (“Cell Deployment Indicator”, “Wait Time”, and “Sync Mode”) to the mobile station 200 to be handed over. Accordingly, the “frequency” may be used instead of the “cell” described in the second embodiment, and the mobile communication system 10 can implement what has been described in the second embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately control the cell capacity and ensure continuity of communication.

 また、アンテナの構成を変更することで、1つの基地局100(又はセル)において通信方式を第1の方式と第2の方式に分割したり統合したりすることも可能である。通信方式としては、LTEや5Gなどがある。移動局200では通信方式を変更することでハンドオーバを行う場合があり、この場合でも、第2の実施の形態で説明した“セル”に代えて“通信方式”とすることで、移動通信システム10では第2の実施の形態で説明したことを実施することが可能となる。 Also, by changing the configuration of the antenna, it is possible to divide or integrate the communication method into the first method and the second method in one base station 100 (or cell). Communication methods include LTE and 5G. The mobile station 200 may perform handover by changing the communication method. Even in this case, the mobile communication system 10 can be replaced with the “communication method” instead of the “cell” described in the second embodiment. Then, what has been described in the second embodiment can be implemented.

 さらに、アンテナの構成を変更することで、1つの基地局100(又はセル)においてオペレータ(又は通信キャリア)を第1のオペレータと第2のオペレータに分割したり統合したりすることも可能である。この場合でも、移動局200ではオペレータの変更によりハンドオーバを行う場合があり、第2の実施の形態で説明した“セル”に代えて“オペレータ”とすることで移動通信システム10では第2の実施の形態で説明したことを実施することが可能となる。 Furthermore, by changing the configuration of the antenna, it is possible to divide or integrate the operator (or communication carrier) into the first operator and the second operator in one base station 100 (or cell). . Even in this case, the mobile station 200 may perform a handover by changing the operator. By replacing the “cell” described in the second embodiment with an “operator”, the mobile communication system 10 performs the second implementation. It becomes possible to carry out what has been described in the form.

 このようにアンテナの構成を変更することで、ある対象を分割したり統合したりすることで移動局200においてハンドオーバが発生するような場合であれば、“セル”に代えて“対象”とすることで、第2の実施の形態と同様に実施することが可能となる。このような“対象”の例としては上述した非特許文献4に記載された6つのパターンが含まれる。非特許文献4には、例えば、送信と受信で異なるアンテナとなるようにするパターンなどがあるが、セル分割によりこのようなパターンが実行される場合には、上述した第2の実施の形態の例が適用可能である。 In this way, if a handover occurs in the mobile station 200 by dividing or integrating a certain target by changing the antenna configuration, the “target” is used instead of the “cell”. As a result, it can be carried out in the same manner as in the second embodiment. Examples of such “objects” include the six patterns described in Non-Patent Document 4 described above. Non-Patent Document 4 includes, for example, a pattern that allows different antennas for transmission and reception. When such a pattern is executed by cell division, the pattern of the second embodiment described above is used. Examples are applicable.

 図39は基地局100、図40は移動局200、図41は保守システム300、アクセスゲートウェイ400、又は位置情報サーバ500のハードウェア構成例を表す図である。 39 is a diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of the base station 100, FIG. 40 is a mobile station 200, and FIG. 41 is a hardware configuration of the maintenance system 300, the access gateway 400, or the location information server 500.

 図39に示すように、基地局100は、アンテナ101、CPU150、ROM(Read Only Memory)151、RAM(Random Access Memory)152、メモリ153、DSP(Digital Signal Processor)154、無線処理部155、及びIF(Interface)156を備える。 39, the base station 100 includes an antenna 101, a CPU 150, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 151, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 152, a memory 153, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 154, a wireless processing unit 155, An IF (Interface) 156 is provided.

 CPU150は、ROM151に記憶されたプログラムを読み出してRAM152にロードし、ロードしたプログラムを実行することで、制御信号処理部105、セル制御部106、アンテナ制御部107、トラフィック情報管理部108、移動局位置情報管理部109、送信電力制御部111の機能を実行する。従って、CPU150は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における制御信号処理部105、セル制御部106、アンテナ制御部107、トラフィック情報管理部108、移動局位置情報管理部109、送信電力制御部111に対応する。 The CPU 150 reads out a program stored in the ROM 151, loads it into the RAM 152, and executes the loaded program, whereby the control signal processing unit 105, the cell control unit 106, the antenna control unit 107, the traffic information management unit 108, the mobile station The functions of the position information management unit 109 and the transmission power control unit 111 are executed. Therefore, for example, the CPU 150 is connected to the control signal processing unit 105, the cell control unit 106, the antenna control unit 107, the traffic information management unit 108, the mobile station location information management unit 109, and the transmission power control unit 111 in the second embodiment. Correspond.

 また、DSP154は、CPU150からの指示に従って、受信多元接続処理部103、復調・復号部104、符号化・変調部112、及び送信多元接続処理部113の機能を実行する。従って、DSP154は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における受信多元接続処理部103、復調・復号部104、符号化・変調部112、及び送信多元接続処理部113に対応する。 Further, the DSP 154 executes functions of the reception multiple access processing unit 103, the demodulation / decoding unit 104, the encoding / modulation unit 112, and the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 150. Therefore, the DSP 154 corresponds to, for example, the reception multiple access processing unit 103, the demodulation / decoding unit 104, the encoding / modulation unit 112, and the transmission multiple access processing unit 113 in the second embodiment.

 さらに、メモリ153は、例えば、第2の実施の形態におけるトラフィック情報管理部108と移動局位置情報管理部109に対応する。さらに、無線処理部155は、受信無線部102と送信無線部114に対応する。さらに、IF156は、例えば、第2の実施の形態におけるTCP/IP送受信部110に対応する。 Furthermore, the memory 153 corresponds to, for example, the traffic information management unit 108 and the mobile station location information management unit 109 in the second embodiment. Further, the wireless processing unit 155 corresponds to the reception wireless unit 102 and the transmission wireless unit 114. Further, the IF 156 corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 110 in the second embodiment.

 なお、例えば、基地局100にはCPU150は2つ含まれ、1つが制御信号処理部105、セル制御部106、トラフィック情報管理部108、移動局位置情報管理部109、送信電力制御部111に対応し、他の1つがアンテナ制御部107に対応してもよい。 For example, the base station 100 includes two CPUs 150, one corresponding to the control signal processing unit 105, the cell control unit 106, the traffic information management unit 108, the mobile station location information management unit 109, and the transmission power control unit 111. However, the other one may correspond to the antenna control unit 107.

 移動局200は、アンテナ201、CPU250、ROM251、RAM252、メモリ253、DSP254、無線処理部255を備える。 The mobile station 200 includes an antenna 201, a CPU 250, a ROM 251, a RAM 252, a memory 253, a DSP 254, and a wireless processing unit 255.

 CPU250は、ROM251に記憶されたプログラムを読み出してRAM252にロードし、ロードしたプログラムを実行することで、制御信号抽出部205、ハンドオーバ制御部206、同期処理部207、ロールバック制御部208、制御信号処理部209、送信電力制御部210の機能を実行する。CPU250は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における制御信号抽出部205、ハンドオーバ制御部206、同期処理部207、ロールバック制御部208、制御信号処理部209、送信電力制御部210に対応する。 The CPU 250 reads out the program stored in the ROM 251 and loads it into the RAM 252 and executes the loaded program, whereby the control signal extraction unit 205, the handover control unit 206, the synchronization processing unit 207, the rollback control unit 208, the control signal The functions of the processing unit 209 and the transmission power control unit 210 are executed. The CPU 250 corresponds to, for example, the control signal extraction unit 205, the handover control unit 206, the synchronization processing unit 207, the rollback control unit 208, the control signal processing unit 209, and the transmission power control unit 210 in the second embodiment.

 また、DSP254は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における受信多元接続処理部203、復調・復号部204、符号化・変調部211、送信多元接続処理部212に対応する。さらに、無線処理部255は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における受信無線部202と送信無線部213に対応する。 The DSP 254 corresponds to, for example, the reception multiple access processing unit 203, the demodulation / decoding unit 204, the encoding / modulation unit 211, and the transmission multiple access processing unit 212 in the second embodiment. Further, the wireless processing unit 255 corresponds to, for example, the reception wireless unit 202 and the transmission wireless unit 213 in the second embodiment.

 保守システム300は、CPU350、ROM351、RAM352、メモリ353、IF354を備える。 The maintenance system 300 includes a CPU 350, a ROM 351, a RAM 352, a memory 353, and an IF 354.

 CPU350は、ROM351に記憶されたプログラムを読み出してRAM352にロードし、ロードしたプログラムを実行することで、信号解析部302,305、トラフィック情報管理部303、移動局位置情報管理部306、判定部307の機能を実現する。CPU350は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における信号解析部302,305、トラフィック情報管理部303、移動局位置情報管理部306、判定部307に対応する。 The CPU 350 reads out the program stored in the ROM 351, loads it into the RAM 352, and executes the loaded program, whereby the signal analysis units 302 and 305, the traffic information management unit 303, the mobile station location information management unit 306, and the determination unit 307. Realize the function. The CPU 350 corresponds to, for example, the signal analysis units 302 and 305, the traffic information management unit 303, the mobile station location information management unit 306, and the determination unit 307 in the second embodiment.

 また、メモリ353は、例えば、第2の実施の形態におけるトラフィック情報管理部303と移動局位置情報管理部306に対応する。さらに、IF354は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部301と位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部304に対応する。 Also, the memory 353 corresponds to, for example, the traffic information management unit 303 and the mobile station location information management unit 306 in the second embodiment. Further, the IF 354 corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 301 for the base station and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 304 for the location information server in the second embodiment.

 アクセスゲートウェイ400は、CPU460、ROM461、RAM462、メモリ463、IF464を備える。 The access gateway 400 includes a CPU 460, a ROM 461, a RAM 462, a memory 463, and an IF 464.

 CPU460は、ROM461に記憶されたプログラムを読み出してRAM462にロードし、ロードしたプログラムを実行することで、信号解析部402,405、トラフィック情報管理部403、移動局位置情報管理部406、判定部407の機能を実現する。CPU460は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における信号解析部402,405、トラフィック情報管理部403、移動局位置情報管理部406、判定部407に対応する。 The CPU 460 reads out the program stored in the ROM 461, loads it into the RAM 462, and executes the loaded program, whereby the signal analysis units 402 and 405, the traffic information management unit 403, the mobile station location information management unit 406, and the determination unit 407. Realize the function. The CPU 460 corresponds to, for example, the signal analysis units 402 and 405, the traffic information management unit 403, the mobile station location information management unit 406, and the determination unit 407 in the second embodiment.

 また、メモリ463は、例えば、第2の実施の形態におけるトラフィック情報管理部403と移動局位置情報管理部406に対応する。さらに、IF464は、例えば、第2の実施の形態における基地局向けTCP/IP送受信部401と位置情報サーバ向けTCP/IP送受信部404に対応する。 Further, the memory 463 corresponds to, for example, the traffic information management unit 403 and the mobile station location information management unit 406 in the second embodiment. Further, the IF 464 corresponds to, for example, the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 401 for base stations and the TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 404 for location information servers in the second embodiment.

 位置情報サーバ500は、CPU510、ROM511、RAM512、メモリ513、IF514を備える。移動局200の位置情報はCPU510の制御によってIF514を介してメモリ513に記憶される。また、CPU510はメモリ513に記憶された移動局200の位置情報を適宜読み出して、IF514を介して保守システム300へ送信する。 The location information server 500 includes a CPU 510, a ROM 511, a RAM 512, a memory 513, and an IF 514. The position information of the mobile station 200 is stored in the memory 513 via the IF 514 under the control of the CPU 510. In addition, the CPU 510 appropriately reads the position information of the mobile station 200 stored in the memory 513 and transmits it to the maintenance system 300 via the IF 514.

10:移動通信システム
100(100-1,100-2):基地局装置(eNB)
101:アンテナ           102:受信無線部
105:制御信号処理部        106:セル分割/統合制御部
107:アンテナ制御部        108:トラフィック情報管理部
109:移動局位置情報管理部     110:TCP/IP送受信部
114:送信無線部          120:AAS
121:BBU            
125-1,125-2,…:トランシーバユニット
126-1、126-2,…:アンテナ(又はアンテナエレメント)
200(200-1,200-2):移動局装置
206:セル分割/統合に対するハンドオーバ制御部
207:同期処理部          208:ロールバック制御部
250:CPU            300:保守システム(EMS/NMS)
303:トラフィック情報管理部    306:移動局位置情報管理部
307:セル分割/統合(アンテナ構成)判定部/移動局判定部
350:CPU            400:アクセスゲートウェイ
403:トラフィック情報管理部    406:移動局位置情報管理部
407:セル分割/統合(アンテナ構成)判定部/移動局判定部
450:MME            500:位置情報サーバ
510:CPU            560:E-SMLC
10: Mobile communication system 100 (100-1, 100-2): Base station apparatus (eNB)
101: Antenna 102: Reception radio unit 105: Control signal processing unit 106: Cell division / integration control unit 107: Antenna control unit 108: Traffic information management unit 109: Mobile station location information management unit 110: TCP / IP transmission / reception unit 114: Transmission radio unit 120: AAS
121: BBU
125-1, 125-2, ...: Transceiver units 126-1, 126-2, ...: Antenna (or antenna element)
200 (200-1, 200-2): Mobile station apparatus 206: Handover control unit 207 for cell division / integration: Synchronization processing unit 208: Rollback control unit 250: CPU 300: Maintenance system (EMS / NMS)
303: Traffic information management unit 306: Mobile station location information management unit 307: Cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit 350: CPU 400: Access gateway 403: Traffic information management unit 406: Mobile station location information Management unit 407: Cell division / integration (antenna configuration) determination unit / mobile station determination unit 450: MME 500: Location information server 510: CPU 560: E-SMLC

Claims (23)

 移動局装置の位置情報を管理する位置情報サーバと接続可能な通信装置において、
 基地局装置と前記移動局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を前記基地局装置から受信し、前記移動局装置の前記位置情報を前記位置情報サーバから受信する送受信部と、
 前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいて前記基地局装置におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することを決定し、前記第2の構成への変更指示を、前記送受信部を介して前記基地局装置へ送信する判定部と
 を備えることを特徴とする通信装置。
In a communication device connectable with a location information server that manages location information of a mobile station device,
A transmission / reception unit that receives traffic information related to traffic between a base station device and the mobile station device from the base station device, and receives the location information of the mobile station device from the location information server;
Based on the traffic information and the location information, it is determined to change the antenna configuration in the base station apparatus from the first configuration to the second configuration, and an instruction to change to the second configuration is sent to the transmission / reception unit. And a determination unit that transmits to the base station device via a communication device.
 前記判定部は、前記トラフィック情報に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷が第1の閾値を超えたとき、前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナの構成を前記第1の構成から前記第2の構成に変更して前記基地局装置配下のセルを分割することを決定し、分割したセル対応する前記第2の構成への変更指示を送信することを特徴とする請求項1記載の通信装置。 The determination unit changes the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the position information when the load of the base station apparatus exceeds a first threshold based on the traffic information. The communication apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the communication apparatus determines to divide a cell under the base station apparatus by changing, and transmits an instruction to change to the second configuration corresponding to the divided cell.  前記判定部は、前記基地局装置配下の第1のセルを該第1のセルと第2のセルに分割することを決定することを特徴とする請求項2記載の通信装置。 The communication apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the determination unit determines to divide the first cell under the base station apparatus into the first cell and the second cell.  前記判定部は、前記基地局装置配下の第1のセルを第2のセルと第3のセルに分割することを決定することを特徴とする請求項2記載の通信装置。 The communication device according to claim 2, wherein the determination unit determines to divide the first cell under the base station device into a second cell and a third cell.  前記判定部は、前記トラフィック情報に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷が第2の閾値より低くなったとき、前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナの構成を前記第1の構成から前記第2の構成に変更して前記基地局装置配下のセルを統合することを決定し、統合したセルに対応する前記第2の構成への変更指示を送信することを特徴とする請求項1記載の通信装置。 When the load of the base station apparatus is lower than a second threshold based on the traffic information, the determination unit changes the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the position information. The communication apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the communication apparatus determines that the cells under the control of the base station apparatus are to be integrated, and transmits an instruction to change to the second configuration corresponding to the integrated cell.  前記判定部は、前記基地局装置配下の第1及び第2のセルを該第1のセルに統合することを決定することを特徴とする請求項5記載の通信装置。 The communication device according to claim 5, wherein the determination unit determines to integrate the first and second cells under the base station device into the first cell.  前記判定部は、前記基地局装置配下の第1及び第2のセルを第3のセルに統合することを決定することを特徴とする請求項5記載の通信装置。 The communication device according to claim 5, wherein the determination unit determines to integrate the first and second cells under the base station device into a third cell.  前記送受信部は、前記基地局装置において前記トラフィック情報に基づき前記基地局装置の負荷の状態変化を検出したとき、前記基地局装置から該状態変化を示す状態変化通知を受信し、
 前記判定部は、前記状態変化通知と前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することを決定することを特徴とする請求項1記載の通信装置。
The transmission / reception unit receives a state change notification indicating the state change from the base station device when detecting a state change of the load of the base station device based on the traffic information in the base station device,
The communication apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the determination unit determines to change the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the state change notification and the position information.
 前記判定部は、前記状態変化通知に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷が第1の閾値を超えたことを検出したとき、前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナの構成を前記第1の構成から前記第2の構成に変更して前記基地局装置配下のセルを分割することを決定し、分割したセルに対応する第2の構成への変更指示を送信することを特徴とする請求項8記載の通信装置。 When the determination unit detects that the load of the base station device exceeds a first threshold based on the state change notification, the determination unit changes the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration based on the position information. The change to the second configuration is determined to divide a cell under the base station apparatus, and an instruction to change to the second configuration corresponding to the divided cell is transmitted. Communication device.  前記判定部は、前記状態変化通知に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷が第2の閾値より低くなったことを検出したとき、前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナ構成を前記第1の構成から前記第2の構成に変更して前記基地局装置配下のセルを統合することを決定し、統合したセルに対応する第2の構成への変更指示を送信することを特徴とする請求項8記載の通信装置。 When the determination unit detects that the load of the base station device is lower than a second threshold based on the state change notification, the determination unit changes the antenna configuration from the first configuration based on the position information. The change to the second configuration is determined to integrate cells under the base station apparatus, and an instruction to change to the second configuration corresponding to the integrated cell is transmitted. Communication device.  移動局装置と無線通信を行う基地局装置において、
 前記移動局装置と前記基地局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を取得するトラフィック情報管理部と、
 位置情報サーバが管理する前記移動局装置の位置情報を、通信装置を介して前記位置情報サーバから受信する送受信部と、
 前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更する制御部と
 を備えることを特徴とする基地局装置。
In a base station device that performs wireless communication with a mobile station device,
A traffic information management unit for obtaining traffic information relating to traffic between the mobile station device and the base station device;
A transmitting / receiving unit that receives position information of the mobile station apparatus managed by the position information server from the position information server via a communication apparatus;
A base station apparatus comprising: a control unit that changes a configuration of an antenna from a first configuration to a second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information.
 前記制御部は、前記トラフィック情報に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷が第1の閾値を超えたとき、前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナの構成を前記第1の構成から前記第2の構成に変更して前記基地局装置配下のセルを分割することを特徴とする請求項11記載の基地局装置 The control unit changes the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the position information when a load of the base station apparatus exceeds a first threshold based on the traffic information. 12. The base station apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the base station apparatus is changed to divide cells under the base station apparatus.  前記制御部は、前記トラフィック情報に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷が第2の閾値より低くなったとき、前記位置情報に基づいて前記アンテナの構成を前記第1の構成から前記第2の構成に変更して前記基地局装置配下のセルを統合することを特徴とする請求項11記載の基地局装置。 The control unit changes the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the position information when the load of the base station apparatus becomes lower than a second threshold based on the traffic information. The base station apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the cells under the base station apparatus are integrated by changing.  前記制御部は、前記トラフィック情報に基づいて前記基地局装置の負荷の状態変化を検出したとき、該状態変化を示す状態変化通知を前記送受信部を介して前記通信装置へ送信し、前記送受信部を介して前記通信装置から受信した前記第2の構成への変更指示に従って前記アンテナの構成を変更することを特徴とする請求項11記載の基地局装置。 When the control unit detects a load state change of the base station device based on the traffic information, the control unit transmits a state change notification indicating the state change to the communication device via the transmission / reception unit, and the transmission / reception unit The base station apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the configuration of the antenna is changed in accordance with an instruction to change to the second configuration received from the communication apparatus via a network.  前記制御部は、前記アンテナの構成の変更により前記基地局装置において前記基地局装置配下のセルを分割又は統合することを示す第1のパラメータ、前記基地局装置においてセルの分割処理又はセルの統合処理を開始してから完了するまでの処理時間を示す第2のパラメータ、及び、同期処理を基地局装置主導で行うか又は移動局装置主導で行うかを示す第3のパラメータを含むハンドオーバ開始指示を前記移動局装置へ送信することを特徴とする請求項11記載の基地局装置。 The control unit is a first parameter indicating that the base station apparatus divides or integrates cells under the base station apparatus by changing the configuration of the antenna, cell division processing or cell integration in the base station apparatus Handover start instruction including a second parameter indicating a processing time from the start of processing to completion and a third parameter indicating whether the synchronization processing is performed by the base station device or the mobile station device The base station apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the base station apparatus is transmitted to the mobile station apparatus.  前記第2のパラメータにより示される時間は、前記移動局装置においてハンドオーバ処理を開始してから完了するまでの時間として設定された時間よりも長い時間であることを特徴とする請求項15記載の基地局装置。 The base station according to claim 15, wherein the time indicated by the second parameter is a time longer than a time set as a time from the start to the completion of a handover process in the mobile station apparatus. Station equipment.  前記第1のパラメータは「Cell Deployment Indicator」、前記第2のパラメータは「Wait Time」、前記第3のパラメータは「Sync Mode」であることを特徴とする請求項15記載の基地局装置。 16. The base station apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the first parameter is “Cell Deployment Indicator”, the second parameter is “Wait Time”, and the third parameter is “Sync Mode”.  前記制御部は、前記アンテナの構成の変更により前記基地局装置において前記基地局装置配下のセルを分割又は統合することを示す第1のパラメータと、前記基地局装置においてセルの分割処理又はセルの統合処理を開始してから完了するまでの処理時間を示す第2のパラメータを含む変更通知を前記基地局装置に隣接する隣接基地局装置へ前記送受信部を介して送信することを特徴とする請求項11記載の基地局装置。 The control unit includes a first parameter indicating that the cell under the base station apparatus is divided or integrated in the base station apparatus by changing the configuration of the antenna, and cell division processing or cell A change notification including a second parameter indicating a processing time from the start of integration processing to completion is transmitted to an adjacent base station device adjacent to the base station device via the transmission / reception unit. Item 12. A base station apparatus according to Item 11.  前記制御部は、更に、同期処理を基地局装置主導で行うか又は移動局装置主導で行うかを示す第3のパラメータを含む前記変更通知を前記隣接基地局装置へ前記送受信部を介して送信することを特徴とする請求項18記載の基地局装置。 The control unit further transmits the change notification including a third parameter indicating whether synchronization processing is performed by a base station device or a mobile station device to the adjacent base station device via the transmission / reception unit. The base station apparatus according to claim 18, wherein:  前記制御部は、前記隣接基地局装置に接続した前記移動局装置が前記セルの分割又はセルの統合が行われる前記基地局装置へハンドオーバするとき、前記変更通知を前記送受信部を介して前記隣接基地局装置へ送信することを特徴とする請求項18記載の基地局装置。 When the mobile station apparatus connected to the adjacent base station apparatus hands over to the base station apparatus where the cell division or cell integration is performed, the control unit transmits the change notification via the transmission / reception unit. The base station apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the base station apparatus transmits to the base station apparatus.  移動局装置と、
 前記移動局装置の位置情報を管理する位置情報サーバと、
 前記位置情報サーバと接続可能な通信装置と、
 前記移動局装置と無線通信を行う基地局装置とを備えた移動通信システムにおいて、
 前記通信装置は、
  前記基地局装置と前記移動局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を前記基地局装置から受信し、前記移動局装置の前記位置情報を前記位置情報サーバから受信する送受信部と、
  前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいて前記基地局装置におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することを決定し、前記送受信部を介して前記第2の構成への変更指示を前記基地局装置へ送信する判定部を備える、
 又は、
 前記基地局装置は、
  前記移動局装置と前記基地局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を取得するトラフィック情報管理部と、
  前記位置情報サーバが管理する前記移動局装置の位置情報を、前記通信装置を介して前記位置情報サーバから受信する送受信部と、
  前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更する制御部とを備える
 ことを特徴とする移動通信システム。
A mobile station device;
A location information server for managing location information of the mobile station device;
A communication device connectable to the location information server;
In a mobile communication system comprising a base station device that performs wireless communication with the mobile station device,
The communication device
A transmission / reception unit that receives traffic information related to traffic between the base station device and the mobile station device from the base station device, and receives the location information of the mobile station device from the location information server;
Based on the traffic information and the location information, it is determined to change the antenna configuration in the base station apparatus from the first configuration to the second configuration, and the change to the second configuration is performed via the transmission / reception unit. A determination unit that transmits an instruction to the base station device;
Or
The base station device
A traffic information management unit for obtaining traffic information relating to traffic between the mobile station device and the base station device;
A transmission / reception unit that receives the location information of the mobile station device managed by the location information server from the location information server via the communication device;
A mobile communication system comprising: a control unit that changes the configuration of the antenna from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the position information.
 移動局装置と、
 前記移動局装置の位置情報を管理する位置情報サーバと、
 前記位置情報サーバと接続可能な通信装置と、
 前記移動局装置と無線通信を行う基地局装置とを備えた移動通信システムにおける通信方法であって、
 前記通信装置によって、
  前記基地局装置と前記移動局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を前記基地局装置から受信し、前記移動局装置の前記位置情報を前記位置情報サーバから受信し、
  前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいて前記基地局装置におけるアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更することを決定し、前記送受信部を介して前記第2の構成への変更指示を前記基地局装置へ送信する、
 又は、
 前記基地局装置によって、
  前記移動局装置と前記基地局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報を取得し、
  前記位置情報サーバが管理する前記移動局装置の位置情報を、前記通信装置を介して前記位置情報サーバから受信し、
  前記トラフィック情報と前記位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成を第1の構成から第2の構成に変更する、
 ことを特徴とする通信方法。
A mobile station device;
A location information server for managing location information of the mobile station device;
A communication device connectable to the location information server;
A communication method in a mobile communication system comprising a base station device that performs radio communication with the mobile station device,
By the communication device
Receiving traffic information relating to traffic between the base station device and the mobile station device from the base station device, receiving the location information of the mobile station device from the location information server,
Based on the traffic information and the location information, it is determined to change the antenna configuration in the base station apparatus from the first configuration to the second configuration, and the change to the second configuration is performed via the transmission / reception unit. Transmitting an instruction to the base station device;
Or
By the base station device,
Obtaining traffic information relating to traffic between the mobile station device and the base station device;
Receiving the location information of the mobile station device managed by the location information server from the location information server via the communication device;
The antenna configuration is changed from the first configuration to the second configuration based on the traffic information and the location information.
A communication method characterized by the above.
 基地局装置と無線通信を行う移動局装置において、
 前記移動局装置と前記基地局装置の間のトラフィックに関するトラフィック情報と位置情報サーバが管理する前記移動局装置の位置情報に基づいてアンテナの構成が第1の構成から第2の構成に変更される前記基地局装置から、前記アンテナの構成の変更により前記基地局装置において前記基地局装置配下のセルを分割又は統合することを示す第1のパラメータ、前記基地局装置においてセルの分割処理又はセルの統合処理を開始してから完了するまでの処理時間を示す第2のパラメータ、及び、同期処理を基地局装置主導で行うか又は移動局装置主導で行うかを示す第3のパラメータを含むハンドオーバ開始指示を受信する受信部と、
 前記第1のパラメータにより前記移動局装置においてハンドオーバ処理を開始してから完了するまでの時間として設定された時間を無効化して前記第2のパラメータにより示された前記処理時間に基づいてハンドオーバ処理を行い、前記第3のパラメータにより示された同期処理を行う制御部
 を備えることを特徴とする移動局装置。
In a mobile station device that performs radio communication with a base station device,
The configuration of the antenna is changed from the first configuration to the second configuration based on traffic information relating to traffic between the mobile station device and the base station device and location information of the mobile station device managed by the location information server. A first parameter indicating that the base station apparatus divides or integrates cells under the base station apparatus by changing the antenna configuration from the base station apparatus, cell division processing or cell configuration in the base station apparatus Start of handover including second parameter indicating processing time from start of integration processing to completion, and third parameter indicating whether synchronization processing is performed by base station device or mobile station device A receiving unit for receiving instructions;
Based on the processing time indicated by the second parameter by invalidating the time set as the time from the start to the completion of the handover processing in the mobile station apparatus by the first parameter. And a control unit that performs the synchronization process indicated by the third parameter.
PCT/JP2016/050222 2016-01-06 2016-01-06 Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus Ceased WO2017119077A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2016/050222 WO2017119077A1 (en) 2016-01-06 2016-01-06 Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2016/050222 WO2017119077A1 (en) 2016-01-06 2016-01-06 Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017119077A1 true WO2017119077A1 (en) 2017-07-13

Family

ID=59273552

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/050222 Ceased WO2017119077A1 (en) 2016-01-06 2016-01-06 Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2017119077A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3940966A1 (en) * 2020-07-15 2022-01-19 Nokia Technologies Oy Beam configuration
WO2025141793A1 (en) * 2023-12-27 2025-07-03 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003299142A (en) * 2002-03-29 2003-10-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Base station device, communication control device, mobile communication system, and method for changing sector configuration of base station device
WO2011129231A1 (en) * 2010-04-12 2011-10-20 京セラ株式会社 Wireless communication system, wireless base station, and method for resetting communication parameters
JP2012054736A (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-15 Hitachi Ltd Mobile communication system and load distribution method for the same

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003299142A (en) * 2002-03-29 2003-10-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Base station device, communication control device, mobile communication system, and method for changing sector configuration of base station device
WO2011129231A1 (en) * 2010-04-12 2011-10-20 京セラ株式会社 Wireless communication system, wireless base station, and method for resetting communication parameters
JP2012054736A (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-15 Hitachi Ltd Mobile communication system and load distribution method for the same

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CATT: "Solutions for failures incurred by AAS", 3GPP TSG RAN WG3 MEETING #80, R3-130827, 10 May 2013 (2013-05-10), pages 1 - 3, XP050700863 *
HUAWEI: "Using AAS for coverage modification", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG3 MEETING (#81, R3-131531, 2013.08, 20 August 2013 (2013-08-20), XP050719676 *
LG ELECTRONICS: "Solutions for AAS handover failures", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG3 MEETING #82, R3-132214, 2 November 2013 (2013-11-02), XP050755200 *
NSN: "Service continuity during cell splitting / merging", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG3 MEETING #82, R3-132086, 2 November 2013 (2013-11-02), XP050755121 *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3940966A1 (en) * 2020-07-15 2022-01-19 Nokia Technologies Oy Beam configuration
WO2022012832A1 (en) * 2020-07-15 2022-01-20 Nokia Technologies Oy Beam configuration
CN116195300A (en) * 2020-07-15 2023-05-30 诺基亚技术有限公司 Beam configuration
US12355511B2 (en) 2020-07-15 2025-07-08 Nokia Technologies Oy Beam configuration
WO2025141793A1 (en) * 2023-12-27 2025-07-03 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11723085B2 (en) Service carrier frequency selecting method and apparatus
TWI728697B (en) Rach report with beam selection information
US11190613B2 (en) Method, device, and computer storage medium for radio connection
EP2946632B1 (en) Network-assisted d2d communication using d2d capability information
JP4730979B2 (en) Mobile communication system, base station apparatus, mobile station apparatus, and mobile communication method
EP2892287B1 (en) Base station, user terminal, and processor
US9485798B2 (en) Mobile communication system, base station, user terminal, and processor
JP6169442B2 (en) Mobile communication system and user terminal
JP6998374B2 (en) Measurement reporting methods, user equipment, and network nodes
CN112544107B (en) CGI reporting procedure for SIB 1-free NR cells
JP2013078156A (en) Base station apparatus, mobile station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, transmitter, and receiver
JP2013255061A (en) Radio base station and radio communication system
US20210160744A1 (en) Technique for Updating Cellular Neighbor Relations
US20160127910A1 (en) Methods and apparatus for interference management and resource sharing
EP2943041B1 (en) Mobile communication system, user terminal, base station, and processor
WO2017119077A1 (en) Communication apparatus, base station apparatus, mobile communication system, communication method, and mobile station apparatus
WO2015046105A1 (en) Communication control method, base station, and user terminal
JP2017200223A (en) User terminal, mobile communication system and method
US12063512B2 (en) Systems and methods for securing wireless communication with device pinning
US20160183320A1 (en) Base station and user terminal
JP6055508B2 (en) Radio base station and radio communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16883581

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16883581

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP